AVR-4308CI - Receiver DENON - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL AVR-4308CI DENON

Use this manual in combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen.

GUI Menu Operation (page 23) GUI Menu Map (page 24)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.

2. Retain Instructions - The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed.

5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath lub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool; and the like.

8. Accessories - Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounding of the product should follow the manufacturer's instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn.

10. Ventilation - Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer's instructions have been adhered to.

11. Power Sources - This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12. Grounding or Polarization - This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

1. Power-Cord Protection - Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.

2. Curocor Antenna Grounding - If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article B10 of the National Electrical Code, ANSINFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A.

3. Lightning - For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.

4. Power Lines - An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.

5. Overloading - Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

6. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

7. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

8. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

d) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation.

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this indicates a need for service.

1. Replacement Parts - When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.

2. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.

3. Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

4. Heat - The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

FIGURE 4 EXAMPLE OF ANTERIOR GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE GROUND CLAYP ELECTRIC OFF-IN-FLAME TOMINANT ANTenna LOAD IN FIRE ANTenna DISCUENCE UNIT (PEE SECTION 804) EQUIPMENT CONDUCTORS (ART SECTION 1000) PUMS FOR POWER PUMS FOR POWER PUMS FOR POWER NEUT RATIONAL ELEC. MEAL CODE NEUT RATIONAL ELEC. MEAL CODE

FCC Information (For US customers)

1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION

Product Name: AV Surround Receiver

Model Number: AVR-4308CI

This product contains FCC ID: BV2-MPGBR052.

This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Denon Electronics (USA), LLC

100 Corporate Drive, Marwah, NJ 07430-2041

Tel. [phone] (Main)

2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

3. CAUTION

- To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement, separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons.

- This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

4. NOTE

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This product generates, uses and can reduce radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

■ Recrient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected

- Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

IC Information (For Canadian customers)

1. PRODUCT

This product contains IC 6963A-MPGBR052.

This product complies with RSS-210 of industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003.

APPAREIL

To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (a.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication.

ATTENTION

Accessories 2 Cautions on Handling 3

Cautions on Installation 3

About the Remote Control Unit 3

Inserting the Batteries 3 Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit 3

Part Names and Functions 4

Front Panel 4
Display 4
Rear Panel 5
Remote Control Unit 6

Connections

Preparations 7

Cables Used for Connections 7

Video Conversion Function 8

Speaker Connections 9

Speaker Installation 9 Speaker Connections 9, 10

Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors 11

Connecting the Monitor 12

Connecting the Playback Components 12

DVD Player 12 Record Player 13 CD Player 13 Pod ^® 13 TV/CABLE Tuner 14 Satellite Receiver 14

Connecting the Recording Components 15

Digital Video Recorder 15 Video Cassette Recorder 15 CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck 16

Connections to Other Devices 16

Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector 16 Video Camera / Game Console 17 Component with Multi-channel Output connectors 17 External Power Amplifier 17 USB Port 18 XM Connector 18 Antenna terminals 19 Network Audio 20 Multi Zone 21 External Controller 21

Connecting the Power Cord....22

Once Connections are Completed 22

GUI Menu Operations

Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title....23

Example of Display of Default Values 23

Examples of GUI Screen Displays 23

Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu) 23

Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup) 23

Cursor Position Display 23 Operations 22

GUI Menu Map 24

Auto Setup

Preparations 25

uto Setup 26

1 Auto Setup 26

Error Messages 27

2 Option 27

3 Parameter Check 27

Manual Setup

Speaker Setup....28

1 Speaker Configuration 28

2 Subwoofer Mode 28

3 Distance 28

4 Channel Level 29

5 Crossover Frequency 29

6 Surround Speaker 29

HDMI Setup 30

1 Vp Scaler 30

2 Resolution 30

3 Progressive Mode 30

4 Aspect 30

5 Color Space 30

6 RGB Range 30

7 Auto Lip Sync 30

8 Audio 30

9 Monitor Out 30 Audio Satup 21

Audio Setup 31

1 EXT. IN Setup ....31

2 2ch Direct/Stereo 31

3 Downmix Option ....31

4 Auto Surround Mode 31

Manual EQ 32

Network Setup 32

Network Setup 32 - 35

2 Other 35

Network Information 35

one Setup 36

1 ZONE2 36 2 ZONE9 90

ZONE3 36 Option Setup 37

Option Setup 37 1. Area Assign 37

2 Amp Assign 37 Volume Control 37

3	Source Delete	37
4	GUI	37
5	Quick Select Name	37
6	Trigger Out 1	38
7	Trigger Out 2	38
8	Digital Out	38
9	Remote ID	38
10	2Way Remote	38
11	Dimmer	38
12	Setup Lock	38
13	Maintenance Mode	38
14	Firmware Update	38, 39
15	Add New Feature	39
	language	39

Source Select

Input Source Selection 39,40

Settings Related to Playing Input Sources 40

1	Play	40
2	Auto Preset	40
3	Preset Skip	40
4	Preset Name	40
5	Input Mode	41
6	Rename	41
7	Other	41
8	Playback Mode (iPod)	41
9	Assign	42
10	Playback Mode	42
11	Still Picture	43
12	Antenna Aiming	43

Surround Modes

Standard Playback	43
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources	43
Playing Multi-channel Sources (Doiby Digital, DTS, etc.)	43
DSP Simulation Playback	44
Stereo Playback	44
Direct Playback	44
Playback in the Pure Direct Mode	44

Parameter

Audio	44
1 Surround Parameters	44 - 46
2 Tone	46
3 Room EQ	46
4 RESTORER	46
5 Night Mode	47
6 Audio Delay	47
Picture Adjust	47
1 Contrast	47
2 Brightness	47
3 Chroma Level	47
4 Hue	47

Information

Status 47
1 MAIN ZONE 47
2 ZONE2/3/4 47
Audio Input Signal 49
HDMI Information 48
1 Signal Information 48
2 Monitor1 48
3 Monitor2 48
Auto Surround 48
Quick Select 48
Preset Station 48

Playback

Preparations 49

Turning the Power On 49

Operations During Playback 49

Playing Video and Audio Equipment 49

Basic Operation 49

Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts 50

Basic Operation 50

Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory) 50

Listening to Preset Stations 50

Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs 51

Basic Operation 51

Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID 52

Searching Categories 52

Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly 52

Listening to HD Radio Stations 52

Basic Operation 52

Selecting Audio Programs 53

Check the HD Radio Reception Information 53

iPod®Playback 53

Basic Operation 53, 54

Listening to Music 54

Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod 54

Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices 55

Basic Operation 56

Listening to Internet Radio 57

Presetting Internet Radio Stations 57

Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites 58

Playing Files Stored on a Computer 58

Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices 58, 59

Operating the AVR-4308CI Using a Browser (Web control)

59\~60

Other Operations and Functions

Other Operations....61
Playing Super Audio CD 61
Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)....61, 62

Convenient Functions 62

Channel Level 62

Fader Function 62

Quick Select Function 62

Personal Memory Plus Function 63

Last Function Memory 63

Backup Memory 63

Resetting the Microprocessor 63

Remote Control Unit Operations

Main Remote Control Unit 64

Operating DENON Audio Components 64

Presetting 64

Operating Preset Components 64 \~ 66

Setting the Remote ID 67

Learning Function 67

System Call Function 68

Punch Through Function 68

Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit 68

Adjusting the Backlight's Brightness 69

Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit 69

Sub Remote Control Unit Operations 70, 71

Switching Zones 72

Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit

is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode) 72

Setting the Remote ID 72

Resetting the Settings 72

Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations

Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function .....72 - 75

Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out Output

Multi-Zone Operations 76

Turning the Power On and Off 76

Selecting the Input Source 76

Adjusting the Volume 76

Turning off the Sound Temporarily 76

Other Information 77 - 88

Troubleshooting 89 \~ 92

Specifications 93

List of preset codes End of this manual

Getting Started

Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner's manual carefully before using the product.

After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.

Accessories

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

① Owner's manual 1
② Warranty (for North America model only) 1
③ Service station list 1
④ Power cord (Cord length: Approx. 5 ft /1.5 m) ...... 1
⑤ Main remote control (RC-1068) 1
⑥ LR6/AA batteries (for RC-1068) 2
⑦ Sub remote control (RC-1070) 1
⑧ R03/AAA batteries (for RC-1070) 2
⑨ FM indoor antenna 1
⑩ AM loop antenna (small, for AM broadcasts) 1
⑪ AM loop antenna (large, for HD Radio broadcasts) ..... 1
⑫ Dipole antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) 1
⑬ Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection 1
⑭ Setup microphone (Cord length: Approx. 25 ft / 7.6 m) ..... 1

Illustration of various household appliances with numbered labels for identification.

Cautions on Handling

• Before turning the power switch on

Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are no problems with the connection cables.

- Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

- About condensation

If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate properly.

If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit.

• Cautions on using mobile phones

Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.

- Moving the unit

Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before moving the unit.

- Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual unit for explanation purposes.

Cautions on Installation

Note:

For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.

About the Remote Control Unit

In addition to the AVR-4308C, the included main remote control unit (RC-106B) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below.

① DENON system components

is② Non-DENON system components

- By setting the preset memory (page 64 - 66)

- By using the learn function (page 67)

Inserting the Batteries

① Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid.

(RC-1068) (RC-1070)

② Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the battery compartment.

(RC-1068) (RC-1070)

③ Put the rear cover back on.

NOTE

- Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit.

• The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.

- When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the "⊕" and "⊖" marks in the battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:

- Do not use a new battery together with an old one.

- Do not use two different types of batteries.

- Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.

- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in flames.

- If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

- Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.

- When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible.

Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

Approx. 23 feet / 7 m 30° 30° {RC-10/0} {RC-106B}

NOTE

The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight, strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light.

Part Names and Functions

For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).

Front Panel

DENON 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 -0.01 PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATRISH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAH PANATAA

[With the door open]

Labeled diagram of a device control panel with numbered components and connections

① Power operation button

(ON/STANDBY)....(49)

② Power indicator
③ Power switch (ON OFF) ..... (49)
4 QUICK SELECT buttons / indicators......(62)
⑤ MASTER VOLUME control knob......(49)
⑥ Master volume indicator
⑦ Display

8 Remote control sensor....(3)
⑨ SOURCE SELECT knob....(39)
⑩ SOURCE button....(39)
⑪ TUNING PRESET button …… (50)
⑫ ZONE 2/3/4 / REC SELECT button……(61, 76)
13 VIDEO SELECT button ...... (41)
14 Headphones jack (PHONES)....(49)
⑮ ZONE2 ON/OFF button ..... (76)
16 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ..... (76)
17 ZONE4 ON/OFF button ..... (76)
18 MENU button....(23)
19 Cursor buttons (△▽◀▷)……(23)
20 CH SEL / ENTER button (23, 62)
② RETURN button …… (23)
22 V.AUX INPUT connectors.... (17)
23 SETUP MIC jack (25)
24 ROOM EQ button (46)
25 DIMMER button....(38)

26 USB port (18)
27 STATUS button ..... (48)
28 INPUT MODE button ..... (41)
29 RESTORER button (46)

30 DIRECT/STEREO button....(44)
③1 PURE DIRECT button....(44)
③2 DSP SIMULATION button ..... (44)
35 STANDARD button ...... (43)

Display

DD DIGITAL ACD DSD DCB FET S R G AUTO MP3 STERS TUNUM AIDS EOG DH ANA FET F S R G DH DH AUTO HD NEO.6 96/24 DD DIGITAL+ DDIPL II x 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MONITOR 1:2 SW FL C F3 SL A B SP FL S R SB

① Input signal indicators
② Input signal channel indicators
These light when digital signals are input
③ Information display
The input source name, surround mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.
4 Output signal channel indicators
⑤ Surround speaker indicators
These light according to the settings of the surround A and B speakers.
⑥ Monitor output indicators
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to "Auto (Dual)", the indicators light according to the connection status.
⑦ Master volume indicator
⑧ AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicator
This lights when the room equalizer is selected.
9 Recording output source indicator
This lights when the REC OUT mode is selected.
⑩ NIGHT indicator
This lights when the night mode is selected
⑪ Multi zone indicators
These light when the power for the respective zone is turned on.

⑫ RESTORER indicator
This lights when the RESTORER mode is selected.
⑬ ADVANCED AL24 indicator
This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing is activated ( page 791.
14 D.LINK indicator
This lights when playing using DENON LINK connections.
⑮ Input mode indicators
⑯ HDMI indicator
This lights when playing using HDMI
connections.
⑰ Decoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are operating.
18 Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to "TUNER" or "HD Radio".
• AUTO
This lights when in the auto tuning mode.
• STEREO
In the FM mode, this lights when receiving analog stereo broadcasts.
• TUNED
This lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.

Rear Panel

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 HDMI ASSEMBL 1 10VDD 2 DDPY 3 (TV/DR) 4 DVRI 1 MONITOR COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIOLE 1 HND IN 3 CIVOLI ZONE 2 12 VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO RND HDD TV/CBL SAT VCR/PGM DVR VCR DVR ZONE 3 ZONE 2 FR SM DR SW FR SW SR SR DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA DIANA

① RS-232C connector …… (21)

② TRIGGER OUT jacks .....(21)

③ FM/AM antenna terminals

(TUNER ANTENNA) ...... (19)

⑥ AC OUTLETS....(22)

⑦ AC inlet (AC IN)....(22)

8 HD Radio antenna terminals

(DTU ANTENNA)....(19)

9 Digital audio connectors

(OPTICAL / COAXIAL) 112, 14

⑩ WLAN ANTENNA terminal (20)

⑪ ETHERNET connector....(20)

⑫ USB port (18)

⑬ XM connector (SATTU)....(18)

14 DENON LINK connector....(16)

COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ..... (12)

16 HDMI connectors....(11)

20 PRE OUT connectors....(17, 21)

② EXT. IN connectors …… (17)

② SIGNAL GND terminal …… (13)

Remote Control Unit

□ Main remote control unit (RC-1068)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DENON RC-TERB 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

① Signal transmission indicator …… (64)

② Mode select buttons 164

③ Quick select / System call buttons … (62, 68)

④ Surround mode buttons .....(43, 44)

⑤ System buttons ..... (65, 66)

⑤ Audio delay button (A. DL) ......(47)

⑦ Tuner system buttons ..... (50)

⑧ Input mode button (INPUT) ..... 141

9 MENU button 123

⑩ Cursor buttons (△▽◀ ▷) …… (23)

⑪ Parameter / Search button

(PARA / SRCH) 44, 52, 54

⑫ Monitor select (M. SEL) /

HOME button (30, 64)

⑬ Channel buttons (CH) 150

14 Input source select / Number buttons-- (39, 50)

15 Remote control signal transmitter....(3)

16 Device select indicators (DEV1 / DEV2) ... 164

⑰ ZONE3 / ZONE4 select indicators

(Z3 / Z4) (76)

⑱ RESTORER button (RSTR)....(46)

⑲ Night button (NGT) ...... (47)

20 Test tone button (TEST) 129

② Surround speaker select button (SPKR)…(29)

22 POWER buttons (49)

② Channel select (CH SEL) /

ENTER button (23, 62)

24 Return button (RTN) ...... (23)

25 Master volume control buttons (VOL)……(49)

26 Muting button (MUTE) 149, 76)

⑳ Main remote control unit setup button

(RC SETUP) ...... (64)

The time for which the backlight stays on can be changed (27 page 68 "Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit").

NOTE

The ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT (1 \~ 3), A. DL, RSTR, NGT, INPUT, SPKR, TEST and surround mode buttons cannot be used.

☐ Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DENON NC-1018 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MOUT TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAY TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURSDAVS TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT TURDUT

① ZONE indicators....(72)

② Advanced setup button....(72)

③ Input source select buttons ..... (39)

④ CHANNEL buttons ..... (49)

⑤ SHIFT button....(50)

⑥ MENU button ...... (23)

⑦ Cursor buttons (△▽◀ ▷) …… (23)

⑧ SEARCH button ..... (52, 54)

⑨ REPEAT button....(54)

⑩ RANDOM button (54)

⑪ Remote control signal transmitter……(3)

⑫ ZONE SELECT button …… (72)

⑬ Zone power on/off buttons

(ZONE ON / ZONE OFF) ..... (76)

14 Master volume control buttons

(VOLUME) 1701

⑮ Muting button (MUTE) ...... (49, 76)

16 ENTER button (23)

⑰ RETURN button ...... (23)

18 System buttons (50, 70)

19 ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES

(DIRECT PLAY) button ..... (70)

⑳ USB (DIRECT PLAY) button....(70)

NOTE

The AUX-1, AUX-2, AUX-3, DVR-2 and OPTION buttons cannot be used.

Connections

Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are described in these operating instructions. Please select the types of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting. With some types of connections, certain settings must be made on the AVR-4308CI. For details, refer to the instructions for the respective connection items below.

NOTE

• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).
• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.

Preparations

Cables Used for Connections

Select the cables according to the equipment being connected.

Audio cables Video cables
Coaxial digital connections

Optical digital connections

Analog connections (stereo)

Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer)

DENON LINK connections

Speaker connections

Network connections (wired LAN)

Component video connections

S-Video connections

Video connections

Audio and video cables

HDMI connections

Signal direction

Audio signal: Video signal:

Output Input Output Output Input Output

Video Conversion Function

• This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVR-4308CI into the format used to output the video signals from the AVR-4308CI to a monitor.
• The AVR-4308CI's video input/output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video signals:
  Digital video signals: HDMI
  Analog video signals: Component video, S-Video and Video

[Flow of video signals inside the AVR-4308CI]

graph TD
    A["Main zone"] --> B["High picture quality playback"]
    B --> C["Video inputs Video outputs"]
    C --> D["Monitor"]
    subgraph_HDI1["HDMI connector"]
        E["Y Pa/Cr Pn/Cr"]
        F["Component video connectors"]
        G["S-Video connector"]
        H["Video connector"]
    end
    subgraph_HDI2["HDMI connector"]
        I["Y Pa/Cr Pn/Cr"]
        J["Component video connectors"]
        K["S-Video connector"]
        L["Video connector"]
    end
    C -.->|When 480i/576i signals are input in the main zone| M["Monitor"]

[Flow of video signals for ZONE2]

graph TD
    A["Input Device 1"] --> B["High picture quality playback"]
    C["Input Device 2"] --> B
    D["Input Device 3"] --> B
    B --> E["Video inputs Video outputs"]
    E --> F["Video connector"]
    F --> G["Component video connectors"]
    G --> H["Video connector"]
    H --> I["Video outputs"]
    I --> J["Component video connectors"]
    J --> K["Video connector"]
    K --> L["ZONE2 monitor"]
    M["Zone2"] --> N["Output"]

• When not using this function, connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video input connector.
• The resolution of the HDMI input-compatible monitor connected to the AVR-4308CI can be checked at GUI menu "Information" - "HDMI Information" - "Monitor1" or "Monitor2" (page 48).

NOTE

• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
• 1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video connectors.
• 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video format.

- When using the component video output connectors for connection to the ZONE2 monitor, the ZONE2's on-screen display is not displayed.

- When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate.

Speaker Connections

Speaker Installation

The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the amplifier combined with 8 speakers and a monitor.

Subwoofer Center speaker Surround back speakers Skers front speakers to the monitor or screen and Surround speakers

Front speakers

Place the front speakers to the sides of the monitor or screen and as flush with the screen surface as possible.

The table below shows a typical speaker configuration for the AVR-4308CI.

	Front		Center	Surround A		Surround B		Surround back			Subwoofer
	L	R		L	R	L	R	L	R	1 only
7.1-channels (Surround A+BI)	○	○	○	○	○	○	○			-	○
7.1-channels	○	○	○	○	○		-	-	○	○	-
6.1-channels	○	○	○	○	○		-	-	-	-	○
5.1-channels	○	○	○	○	○		-	-	-	-	○
3.1-channels	○	○	○		-	-	-	-	-	-	○
2.1-channels	○	○	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	○
2-channels	○	○	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-

Speaker Connections

Example: 7.1-channels (Surround A+B) and ZONE2 use

Front speakers Center speaker Surround back Subwoofer Subwoofer with built-in amplifier ※ L : Left R : Right Surround speakers A Surround speakers B ZONE2 speakers ZONE2

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).

NOTE

By default, the AVR-4308CI's "Amp Assign" setting is set to "ZONE2", so sound is not output simply by connecting a speaker to the surround back terminal. To use as the surround back speaker for the main zone, either turn the ZONE2 power off or change the "Amp Assign" setting (17 page 73, 74).

Connecting the Speaker Cables

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVR-4308CI, and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly.

1 Peel off about 0.03 ft/10 mm of sheathing from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.

2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.

3 Insert the speaker cable's core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal.

4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.

When using a banana plug

Tighten the speaker terminal firmly before inserting the banana plug.

NOTE

• Use speakers with an impedance of 6 to 16 Ω/ohms. When using surround A and B speakers simultaneously, use speakers with an impedance of 8 to 16 Ω/ohms.
• Connect the speaker cables in such a way that they do not stick out of the speaker terminals. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and - sides touch each other (“Protection circuit”).
• Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock.

Protection circuit

If speakers with an impedance lower than specified (for example 4 Ω/ohms speakers) are used for an extended period of time with the volume turned up high, the temperature may rise, activating the protection circuit.

When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is shut off and the power indicator flashes red. If this happens, unplug the power cord, then check the speaker cable and input cable connections. If the set is extremely hot, wait for it to cool off and improve ventilation around it. Once this is done, plug the power cord back in and turn the set's power back on.

If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems in the ventilation around the set nor in the connections, the set may be damaged. Turn the power off, then contact a DENON service center.

Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors

With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.

HDMI OUT MonitorDVD pla HDMI IN

MonitorDVD player

The AVR-4308CI is equipped for HDMI version 1.3a. This version is compatible with other versions, allowing connection to all components equipped with an HDMI connector.

※ The AVR-4308CI is compatible with 30- and 36-bit Deep Color.

Compatible audio format	Details	Discs (examples)
2-channel linear PCM	2ch 32-192 kHz16/20/24 bits	CD, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio
Multi-channel linear PCM	8ch 32-192 kHz16/20/24 bits	DVD-Audio
Dolby Digital, DTS	Bitstream DVD-Video
DSD	2/5.1cn2.8224 MHz1 bit	SACD
Dolby Digital Plus,Dolby TrueHD,DTS-HD	Bitstream	HD DVD,Blu-ray Disc

Copyright protection system (HDCP)

In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVD-Video or DVD-Audio disc using HDMI/DVI connections, both the connected DVD player and monitor must be equipped for a copyright protection system called "HDCP" (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data encoding and mutual identification of the devices.

The AVR-4308CI is HDCP-compatible. For details on the DVD player or monitor you are using, refer to its operating instructions.

• By default, the HDMI audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the AVR-4308CI.
• To output the sound from the TV, make the settings at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "HDMI Setup" - "Audio" - "TV" (page 30).

NOTE

• Use a CPPM-compatible DVD player to play DVD-Audio discs that are copyright-protected by CPPM.
  • The AVR-4308CI cannot be controlled from another device via the HDMI cable.
• The audio signals output from the HDMI connector (sampling frequency, bit rate, etc.) may be restricted by the connected device.
• Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are not HDCP-compatible.
• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor's resolution. In this case, switch the DVD player's resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
• If the GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "HDMI Setup" - "Audio" setting (12 page 30) is set to "Amp," the sound may be interrupted when the monitor's power is turned off.
• Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certified HDMI product) for connection to the HDMI connector. Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certified product).
• If the monitor or DVD player does not support deep color, deep color signal transfer is not possible.
• If the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC, xvYCC signal transfer is not possible.
• If the monitor does not support "Auto Lipsync Correction" function, this function will not work.

• When the AVR 4308CI and DVD player are connected using an HDMI cable, also connect the AVR-4308CI and monitor using an HDMI cable.
• If the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI-D connector, use an HDMI/DVI converter cable. When using a DVI cable, no audio signals are transmitted.
• Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color compatible devices.

When connecting with an HDMI/DVI converter cable (adapter)

• HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI format.
  When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with a DVI-D connector, connection is possible using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, but depending on the combination of components in some cases the video signals will not be output.
• When connecting using an HDMI/DVI converter adapter, the video signals may not be output properly due to poor connections with the connected cable, etc.

Connecting the Monitor

• Connect the cables to be used (page 8 "Video Conversion Function").
• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.
• To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections, set GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "HDMI Setup" - "Audio" to "TV" (page 30).

Monitor HDMI IN VIDEO VIDEO IN S VIDEO IN IN COMPONENT VIDEO V Ps Ps COMPOSER V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V W10000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

NOTE

• The component video connectors may be indicated differently on your monitor. For details, see the monitor's operating instructions.
• The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.

Connecting the Playback Components

Carefully check the left (L) and right (RI) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

DVD Player

• Connect the cables to be used.
• With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.

DVD player HDMI VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO V Pe Pe AUDIO OUTPUT L R CONVIAL OUT AUDIO OUTPUT S VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO V Pe Pe AUDIO OUTPUT L R CONVIAL OUT

• Connect an HDP (High-Definition Player) in the same way.
• When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "DVD" - "Assign" - "Digital" (page 42).

Record Player

Turntable (MM cartridge) AUDIO OUT SND

• When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge, use a
  commercially available MC head amplifier or a step-up transformer.
• Induction humming (a booming sound) may be produced from the speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected.
• With some record players, noise may be generated when the ground wire is connected. If so, disconnect the ground wire.

NOTE

The AVR-4308CI's SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise when a record player is connected. This is not a safety ground terminal.

CD Player

Connect the cables to be used.

CD player AUDIO AUDIO R COXIAL OUT O2

When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "CD" - "Assign" - "Digital" (page 42).

iPod®

Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately) to connect the iPod to the AVR-4308CI. For instructions on the Control Dock for iPod settings, refer to the Control Dock for iPod's operating instructions.

Example :

iPod A&D 1R

• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
• To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR (iPod), make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" – "input source to which iPod dock assigned)" – "Assign" – "iPod dock" (25 page 421).

TV/CABLE Tuner

Connect the cables to be used.

TV tuner VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO OUT L H COVAXIAL OUT

When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "TV/CBL" - "Assign" - "Digital" (page 42).

Satellite Receiver

Connect the cables to be used.

DBS / BS tuner VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO OUT OPTICAL L R Y P5 P1 COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO OUT OPTICAL

• When using a coaxial digital cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "SAT" - "Assign" - "Digital" (E2 page 42).
• When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "SAT" - "Assign" - "Component" (page 42).

Connecting the Recording Components

Carefully check the left (LI) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

Digital Video Recorder

Connect the cables to be used.

Digital video recorder 8 VIDEO IN OUT AUDIOVIDEO INPUT OUT OPTICAL IN OUT OR OR OR OR OR ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC/ON/OFFIC

- Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals.
- When recording to a digital video recorder, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-430BCI DVR OUT connector.
Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : DVR OUT → S-Video cable
TV IN → Video cable : DVR OUT → Video cable
- When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "DVR" - "Assign" - "Component" ( page 42).

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308CI's OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL2.

Video Cassette Recorder

Connect the cables to be used.

Video cassette recorder VIDEO S VIDEO IN OUT AUDIO AUDIO INNOUT RL PL OPTICAL INOUT OF OF

- When recording to a VCR, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-4308CI VCR OUT connector.
Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : VCR OUT → S-Video cable
TV IN → Video cable : VCR OUT → Video cable
- When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "VCR" - "Assign" - "Component" (page 42).

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308CI's OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.

CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck

Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals, or digital connections if you wish to record digital audio signals, depending on the types of connectors on the components being used.

CD recorder / MD recorder / Tape deck AUDIO OUT IN IN FL RL OPTICAL IF IF IF IF

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-1308CI's OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.

Connections to Other Devices

Carefully check the left (LI) and right (RI) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.

Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector

Multi-channel playback is possible with DVD-Audio discs, Super Audio CD, etc.

DVD player AUDIO DENON LINK

To use with DENON LINK connections, make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "Assign" - "Digital" - "DENON LINK" (page 42).

Video Camera / Game Console

Video camera / Game console AUDIO/VIBLED S VIDEO OUT OUT OUT CUT L H OPTICAL AUDIO VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC

Component with Multi-channel Output connectors

DVD player / Super Audio CD player / External decoder ALDO SUB- WOOD-LH FRONT CENTER SERBROONSO L H L H L H BACK DND

External Power Amplifier

Power amplifier AUDIO SUB- WOOFER FRONT CENTER SUPHOLDERS L R L R BACK L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBLI).

• To play the analog input signals input to the EXT. IN connectors, press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button on the main remote control unit and select "EXT. IN" or make the settings at GUI menu "Source Select" - "Input source" - "Input Mode" - "Input Mode" - "EXT. IN" (page 41).
• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player (page 12).
• To play copyright-protected discs, connect the AVR-4308CI's EXT. IN connector with the DVD player's analog multi-channel output connector.

USB Port

□ Front panel □ Rear panel

USB memory device USB memory device

Diagram of an electronic device control panel with labeled ports and connectors, showing connections between ports like USB, USB, and network switches.

• In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel.
  • To change the port to be used, see USB Select on page 42.
• For instructions on playing the files on a USB memory device, see page 58, 59.

NOTE

• Set to the USB port you want to use.
• The AVR-4308CI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the "Source Select" - "NET/USB" - "Playback Mode" - "USB Select" menu.
• Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory device to the AVR-4308CI's USB port. Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference.

XM Connector

• The AVR-4308CI is an XM Ready receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (includes home antenna, each sold separately) and subscribing to the XM service.
• Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on the rear panel.
• Position the Home Dock antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal. For details, see "Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs" (page 51, 52).

When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.

XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock

NOTE

Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connection have been completed.

• The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
  • XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

Antenna terminals

An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.

AM/FM

Direction of broadcasting station FM antenna 75 Ω/ohms Coaxial cable FM indoor antenna (supplied) AM loop antenna (small, supplied) Ground AM outdoor antenna

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

AM loop antenna assembly

① Move the vinyl tie and take the connection line. ④ a. With the antenna on top of any stable surface. Mount

HD Radio

HD Radio is a service that is only available within the United States.

AM loop antenna

(large, for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied)

- To prevent interference, install at least 3.3 feet/1 m away from the antenna connected to the AVR-430BCI's other AM tuner terminal.

Direction of broadcasting station FM antenna 75 Ω/ohms Coaxial cable FM indoor antenna Idipole, for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied AVH-4308CI's other AM tuner terminal. (White/Black) Ground AM outdoor antenna

Connect to the AM antenna terminals.

b. With the antenna attached to a wall.

Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.

Connection of AM antennas

graph LR
    A["1. Push the lever."] --> B["2. Insert the conductor."]
    B --> C["3. Return the lever."]

NOTE

• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.
• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

Network Audio

[Wired LAN]

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["Modem"]
    B --> C["Router"]
    C --> D["To LAN port"]
    C --> E["To LAN port side"]
    F["Computer"] --> G["LAN port/Ethernet connector"]
    G --> H["Switch/Link"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

[Wireless LAN]

Internet Modem Computer To WAN side Router with access point Pod antenna (supplied) Turn clockwise

Required system

□ Broadband Internet connection

A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to use the AVR-4308CI's Internet radio function and firmware update.

Modem

This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to communicate with the Internet. Some are integrated with the router.

Router

• When using the AVR-4308CI, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:
  Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
  This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
  · Built-in 100 BASE-TX switch
  When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching
  hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater
• When using with a wireless LAN, prepare a broadband router with built-in access point.

☐ Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)

Use for wired LAN.

• The AVR-4308CI does not come with an Ethernet cable.

- Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.

We recommend using a normal type cable.

- If the sound is broken in an environment in which there is much power supply noise from electric products or in a noisy network environment, use a shielded type Ethernet cable.

Computer

A computer with the following specifications is required to use a music server:

• OS

Windows® XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista

- Software (Prepare one of the following.)

. .NET Framework 1.1 and Windows Media Connect (Windows XP)

- Windows Media Player ver.11

DLNA-compatible server software

- Internet browser

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later

• LAN port

• 300 MB or more free disk space

※ Free disk space is required to store music and video files. The following sizes are approximate.

Format	Bit rate	Per minute	Per hour
MP3 / WMA	128 kbps	Approx. 1 MB	Approx. 60 MB
	192 kbps	Approx. 1.5 MB	Approx. 90 MB
MPEG-4 AAC	256 kbps	Approx. 2 MB	Approx. 120 MB
	392 kbps	Approx. 3 MB	Approx. 180 MB
WAV (LPCM)	1400 kbps	Approx. 10 MB	Approx. 600 MB
FLAC	1080 kbps	Approx. 77 MB	Approx. 464 MB

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.

NOTE

- A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet. No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband connection to the Internet.

• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an ISP or a computer shop for details.
• Depending on the server, video files may be displayed, but they cannot be played on the AVR-1308CI.

□ Others

• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network settings are made manually, make the settings at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Network Setup" (page 32 \~ 35).
• With the AVR 4308CI, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions to make the network settings automatically.
• When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the AVR-4308CI sets the IP address, etc., automatically. When using the AVR-4308CI connected to a network with no DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc.. at GUI menu: "Manual Setup" – "Network Setup" (GB page 32 - 35).
• The AVR-4308CI is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with which the PPPoE is set.
• Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the AVR-4308CI in the same way.

Multi Zone

ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connections

• If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre-out (variable or fixed level) connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3 the same time (page 72 - 76).
• When using a component video cable to connect the AVR-4308CI and input device, connect the ZONE2 monitor output to the component video connectors. When using an S-Video cable or a video cable, please connect the cable to the video connectors.
  • The ZONE2 video put is only for ZONE2.

Monitor (ZONE2) VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO IN V Ps Pa Power amplifier (ZONE2 or ZONE3) AUDIO IN L R AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO IN R Infrared retransmitter Input Output Infrared sensor Extension jack for future use.

NOTE

• For the audio output, use high quality pin-plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced.
• For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices, refer to the respective devices' operating instructions.
  • To conduct multi-zone playback, see "Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations" (page 72 - 761.

External Controller

Control panel interface with multiple circular gauges and labeled buttons, likely for industrial or control system monitoring

RS-232C connector

This connector is used for an external controller.

※ If you wish to control the AVR-4308CI from an external controller using the RS-232C connector, perform the operation below beforehand.
① Turn on the AVR 4308CI's power.
② Turn off the AVR-4308CI's power from the external controller.
③ Check that the AVR-4308CI is in the standby mode.

• When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) or RF Remote Receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately) two-way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible. The AVR-4308CI's status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed watching the RF Remote Controller's display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices.
• When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller or RF Remote Receiver, make the settings at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "2Way Remote" - "Used" ( page 38).

Control panel interface with multiple rotary switches and labeled buttons, showing system status and function labels

Trigger output jacks

The power of an external device equipped with a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in association with operations on the AVR-4308C. For details, see GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "Trigger Out 1" or "Trigger Out 2" (page 38).
- Output level: 150 mA/12 V Check the trigger input conditions of the connected device.
- If the trigger input level of the connected device is higher than 150 mA/12 V and depending on the short-circuiting conditions, the AVR-430BCI's protection circuit may be activated, in which case "TRIGGER PROTECT" appears on the display. If this happens, turn off the AVR-430BCI's power and disconnect the connected device.

Connecting the Power Cord

Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord.

Power cord (included) To household power outlet (AC 120 V, 60 Hz) Connection to the AC outlets • These outlets supply power to external audio devices. • The power supplied from these outlets turns on and off together with the set's power switch. • Audio equipment with a total power consumption of 120 W (1 AI can be connected.

NOTE

• Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise.
• Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio devices. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment.

Once Connections are Completed

Turning the Power On (page 49)

GUI Menu Operations

With the AVR-4308CI, settings and operations for most functions can be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed on the monitor screen.

The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer's resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.

Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title

Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated from the GUI. We recommend performing such operations from the GUI.

Auto Setup Optimize settings for speakers in use. This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to which this item belongs.

Example of Display of Default Values

In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges, the item surrounded by a border is the default value.

[Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1

Examples of GUI Screen Displays

Some typical examples are described below.

Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)

SOURCE SELECT TUNER PHONO CD DVD HDP TV/CBL DENON Selected item name List of subsequent items Guidance text for item at cursor position Select input source and make playback settings

Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup)

Operation guidance text AUTO SETUP STIPT Speaker Detection Please place the microphone at ear height at main listening position. Start Config. 7.1(R) Amp Assign Start Auto Setup Enter Cancellation Guidance text for item at cursor position Operation step indicators DENON Illustration Operation button guidance

Cursor Position Display

graph TD
    A["Icon"] --> B["Switch the selected item"]
    A --> C["Switch to the next item"]
    A --> D["Selected item"]
    A --> E["Switch the selected item"]
    F["List"] --> G["Selected item"]
    G --> H["Assign Input Mode Rename Other"]
    H --> I["Switch to the next item"]
    I --> J["※ Switch the selected item using △▽."]

Operations

The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit.

1 Press the MENU button. The GUI menu is displayed.

※ To operate from the main remote control unit, be sure to set the remote control unit to the AMP mode.

2 Press the △ ∇ ▷ button to select the menu to be set or operated.

※ To return to the previous item, press the ◀ or RETURN button.

3 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.

4 Press the MENU button to finish.

When "Screensaver" is set to "ON", the screensaver is activated if no operation is performed for about 3 minutes.

GUI Menu Map

Information

( page 47, 48)

J Status
• MAIN ZONE
• ZONE2/3/4
Audio Input Signal
□ HDMI Information
1 Auto Surround Mode
1Quick Select
1 Preset Station

Parameter

page 44 - 47)

Audio

• Surround Parameters

- Mode

Cinema FO

DEC

D.COMB

D.COM

• LIFE

- Center Image

- Pan

- Dimension

- Center Width

Delay Time

Effect

Effort

Effect Level

- Room Size

- AFDM

- SB CH Out

- Subwoofer Att.

Subwoofer

Subwe

- Default

- Lone

· Tone Defeat

- Bass

- Trebl

• Room EO
• RECTORER
- RESTOKER
- Night Mode
- Audio Delay
J Picture Adjust
• Contrast
• Brightness
- brightness
- Chroma Level
• Hue

Source Select (page 39 - 43)

TUNER (FM/AM)

- Play

• Auto Preset

Auto Preset • Present Side

- Preset Skip

- Preset Nam

- Input Mode

- Benan

• Other

Midco Select

Video Select Source Level

□ PHONO

- Input Mode

• Panema

- Other

• Other

Video Select

Source Level

□CD DVD HDP TV/CBL

SAT. VCR. DVR. VAUX

• Play (iPod)

• Playbook Mode (iPod)

- Playback Music (P.O.)

- Assign

- Input Mode

- Renar

- Other

- Video Select

Video Convert (Excluding CDs)

Source Level

□NET/USB

• Play

- Playbook Mode

Playback W

- Still Picture

- Input M

- Rename

- Other

Video Select

Source Level

□XM

- Play

- Preset Skin

- Reset Chip

- Antenna Alming

- Input Mode

- Rename

- Other

- Video Select

. Source Level

HD Radio

• Play

a Auto

Auto Press

- Preset Skip

- Preset Name

- Input Mode

- Rename

• Other

Video Select

- Source Level

Auto Setup page 25 - 27

□ Auto Setup

• STEP1: Speaker Detection

• STEP2: Measurement

- STEP3 Calculation

STEP 5. Calculation

- STEP4: Check

- STEP5: Store

Option

• Boom FO

- Direct Mode

- Direct Mode - Mix Select

- Mike School

□ Parameter

- Speaker Configuration Check

• Distance Check

- Channel Level Check

- Channel Level Of

• Crossover

- EQ Check

- Restore

Manual Setup (page 28 - 39)

Speaker Setup (page 28-30)

• Speaker Configuration

- Subsatzes Mode

- SABMOBOLI MODE

• Distance

- Channel Level

• Crossover Frequency

• Surround Speaker

DHTML Setup 20

□ HDMI Setup (W) page 50

- Up Scales

- Resolution

• Progressive Mode

- Aspect

• Color Space

1. PCD

- RGB Range

• Auto Lip Sync

- Audio

• Monitor Out

□ Audio Setup (page 31, 32)

- EXT IN Setup

Surround Speaker

Surround Speaker

- Subwood

• 2ch Direct/Stereo

- Downmix Option

• Auto Surround Mode

- Manual EO

Manual 24

J Network Setup (page 32 - 35)

Network Setup

- Others

Other

- Power Saving

- Character

- PC Language

• Network Information

3 Zona Satu (Wang 25)

3 Zone Setup 4.8 Page 507

ZONEZ

- Bass

· Treble

· HPF

- Lch Level

Rch Level

Channel

Channel

- Volume Level

- Volume Limit

- Power On Level

Mute Level

ZONE3

ECONES

- Bass

- Treble

· HPF

-Lch Level

Roh Level

Horn Lork Chamard

Channel

• Volume Level

- Volume Limit

· Power On Level

Mute Level

Option Setup (page 37 - 39)

• Amp Assian

• Volume Control

- Volatile Control

- Volume Limit

· Power On Level

- Mute Level

- Source Delete

• GUI

301

· Screensaver

· Wall Paper

· Format

- Text

Mester Volume

• Master Volume

·NET/USB

-iPod

· Tuner

- Quick Select Name

a. Trigger Out 1

Trigger But

- Trigger Out 2

• Digital Out

- Remote ID

• 2Way Remote

- Dimmer

- Cetern, L.

- Setup LOCK

- Maintenance Mode

- Firmware Update

- Add New Feature

Language (页 page 39)

Auto Setup

• Audyssey MultEQ® XT automatically measures the acoustical problems in the listening environment to create the best audio experience for your home theater.
• It optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are seated.

Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone (DM-A505Z) successively at multiple positions throughout the listening area as shown in Example ①. For best results, it is strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the measurements have the proper spatial weighting.

Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example (2), measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction.

Example ① Example ②

(■Measuring positions)

Simple diagram with a central icon and surrounding stars and sound waves, no text or symbols present.

About the main listening position (\*M)

The main listening position refers to the most central position where one would normally sit within the listening environment. MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.

To make manual adjustments to the settings, see pages 2B - 30.

Preparations

1 Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit.

The auto setup screen appears automatically.

Sound receptor

2 Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand with the microphone pointing directly up towards the ceiling.

Setup microphone

※ It is not recommended to hold it in your hand. Be sure that the path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects. Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound reflections may give inaccurate results.

When using a subwoofer, make the following settings before starting the auto setup procedure:

• Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible
• If this is not possible then set
  • Volume: "12 o'clock" position
  • Crossover frequency: "Maximum/Highest Frequency"
• Low pass filter: "Off"
• Standby mode: "Off"

NOTE

• Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup procedure is completed.
• When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting the auto setup procedure.

Auto Setup Optimize settings for speakers in use. Menu tree Auto Setup 1 Auto Setup 2 Option 3 Parameter

graph TD
    A["STEP1: Speaker Detection"] --> B["STEP2: Measurement (2 to 8 positions)"]
    B --> C["STEP3: Calculation"]
    C --> D["STEP4: Check"]
    D --> E["STEP5: Store"]

Start

Start Auto Setup.

The Audyssey MultEQ XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates the size, level, distance, bass management crossover frequency, and optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer. Audyssey MultEQ XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area.

Before starting, connect and position all your speakers.

Once started, MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each speaker.

If an error message appears during the measurements, check "Error Messages" (28 page 27), take the advised action, then start the measurements again.

Configuration

The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time here.

[Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1

Setting the correct speaker configuration can reduce the time required to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not have to look for speakers that are not connected.

Amp Assign

Advanced setting : changes power amplifier assignment.

NOTE

The items selectable at "Config." differ according to the "Amp Assign" settings.

STEP1: Speaker Detection

The speaker connection and polarity are detected at the first measurement position. The following attributes are also determined at this time: "Speaker Size", "Speaker Distance", "Channel Level", "Crossover Frequency".

Once the measurements are completed, the results are displayed.

NOTE

• Loud test tone may be played during Audyssey MultEQ XT Automatic Speaker Setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in room, these test tones will increase in volume.
• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate readings.
• Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and refrain from talking. Turn off air conditioning units or other devices that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected by these sounds.
• Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL +/- buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
• Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after "STEP1."

STEP2: Measurement

After completing a measurement position, move the microphone to the next position.

Measure at least 6 positions (main listening position and at least 5 other surrounding positions). For best results it is recommend measuring 6 or more positions (with a maximum of 8 positions).

STEP3: Calculation

When "Calculate" is selected at "STEP2", the measurements taken are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system interacts with the room.

The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected. The higher the number of speakers, the longer the time required for analysis.

STEP4: Check

Once the auto setup procedure is complete, a measuring result check screen appears.

Select any item whose results you want to check to review the results.

Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for speakers with built-in filters (subwoofers, etc.). This is because filters add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated.

STEP5: Store

The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVR-4308CI.

NOTE

Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored.

Error Messages

If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation, the measuring environment, etc., an error message is displayed. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform the auto setup procedure over again.

Error messages (examples) Cause Measures
No microphone or speaker •	Included setup microphone is not connected.• Not all speakers could be detected.	• Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit.• Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or Level is too low	• Too much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be made.• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be made.	• Either turn off any device generating noise or move away.• Try again when the surroundings are quieter.• Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.• Adjust the subwoofer's volume.
None • Displayed speaker could not be detected.	• The front L and front R speakers were not properly detected.• Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround (BI) speakers was detected.• Sound was output from the R channel when only one surround back speaker was connected.• The surround back or the surround (BI) speaker was detected, but the surround (A) speaker was not detected.	• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Phase	• Displayed speaker connected with the polarities reversed.	• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.• For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure that the wiring is correct, select "Skip".

Select "Retry" to make the measurements again.

NOTE

Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections.

2 Option

Select settings for room EQ, mic, etc.

Room EQ

Select room EQ setting method.

[Selectable items] All Assign

Direct Mode

Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Mic Select

Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic. The microphone connected to V.AUX Lch is used.

[Selectable items] Mic V.AUX L

Only a professionally certified installer should ever connect a professionally-calibrated microphone to the V.AUX L input on the front panel.

3 Parameter Check

Check auto setup measurement results. This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is completed.

[Items to be checked]

Spkr Config Check Distance Check

Ch. Level Check Crossover Check

EQ Check

The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated by MultEO XT when "Restore" is selected.

Manual Setup

Make detail settings for various parameters.

Speaker Setup

Use this procedure to set the speakers manually or if you wish to change the settings made with the auto setup procedure.

Manual Setup
Speaker Setup
1 Speaker Configuration
2 Subwoofer Mode
■
5 Distance
4 Channel Level
5 Crossover Frequency
6 Surround Speaker

1 Speaker Configuration

Select speaker configuration and size, (pass reproduction capability)

Front

Select front speaker size.

[Selectable items]

Small

Center

Select center speaker use and size.

[Selectable items] Large

Small None

Subwoofer

Select subwoofer use.

[Selectable items]

No

Surround A

Select surround speakers A use and size.

[Selectable items]

Large

Small

None

Surround B

Select surround speakers B use and size.

[Selectable items]

Large

Small

None

Surround Back

Select surround back speaker use and size.

[Selectable items]

Large

Small

None

2spkrs

1spkr

Large

: Select this for a large speaker with strong bass reproduction.

Small

: Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass reproduction.

• Select "Large" or "Small" not according to the physical size of the speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities based on the frequency set at "Crossover Frequency" ( page 291.
• When "Front" is set to "Small", "Subwoofer" is automatically set to "Yes".
• If "Subwoofer" is set to "No," "Front" is automatically set to "Large".
• If "Surround A" is set to "None", "Surround B" and "Surround Back" are automatically set to "None".
• When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).

2 Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.

[Selectable items]

LFE+Main

• This can be set when GUI menu "Speaker Configuration" - "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes".
• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
• Select "LFE+Main" if you want the base signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

3 Distance

Set distance from listening position to speakers. Before making the settings, measure the distance from the listening position to the different speakers.

Feet / Meters

Select unit for distance.

Step

Select step. (smallest distance)

[Selectable items]

1ft

0.1ft

Can be selected when "Feet" is set.

0.1m

0.01m

Can be selected when "Meters" is set.

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Distance measurement

Select the speaker you want to set, then set the distance. Set the value closest to the measured distance.

[Variable range]

0.0ft

0.0ft

Display when "Feel" is set.

0.00m

8.00m : Display when "Meters" is set.

Set the distance between the listening position and the various speakers to no more than 20.0 ft (6.00 meters).

Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all speakers.
Select test tone playback method.
[Selectable items] Auto Manual
Select surround speaker from which test tone is output.
[Selectable items] A B A+B
Output test tone.
[Variable range] -12dB \~ 0dB \~ +12dB
Resets the settings to the default values.
Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones only possible in the "Auto" mode and only effective in the STANDARD (Dolby / DTS Surround) mode. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory.
① Press the TEST button.
Test tones are output from the various speakers.
② Use the ◀ button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all speakers.
③ When the adjustments are completed, press the TEST button again.

4 Channel Level

Mode

Surround

Start

Default

Operating from the main remote control unit

[Adjusting using test tones]

• When the GUI menu "Speaker Configuration" – "Surround Back" setting (127 page 28) is set to "1spkr", the surround back speak display is set to "Surround Back".
• Speakers set to "None" in the "Speaker Configuration" settings are not displayed.
• "Surround" can be set when GUI menu "Speaker Configuration" – "Surround A" or "Surround B" is set to "Large" or "Small" (page 28).
• When using surround speakers, be sure to adjust the volume of the different speakers.
• When "Channel Level" is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes, use the operation see page 62.

5 Crossover Frequency

Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal.

[Selectable items]

40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz
120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz

Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set here is output.

^3 Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the speakers you are using.

Advanced

Set the crossover frequency separately for the different speakers.

• The "Crossover Frequency" can be set when there are speakers that have been set to "Small" at GUI menu "Speaker Setup" - "Speaker Configuration" or when "Subwoofer" is set to "Yes" ( page 28).
• If in the "Advanced" settings, GUI menu "Subwoofer Mode" is set to "LFE", it is possible to make this setting for speakers set to "Small" at "Speaker Configuration". If set to "LFE+Main", this setting can be made regardless of the speaker size.
• For speakers set to "Small", sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.
• Always set the crossover frequency to "80 Hz". When using small speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to a higher frequency.

6 Surround Speaker

Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode.

[Selectable items] A B A+B

Operating from the main remote control unit

Press the SPKR button.

• This can be set when GUI menu "Speaker Configuration" - "Surround A" and "Surround B" are used (page 28).
• When using the pre-out connectors, select and use either "Surround A" or "Surround B".
• Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to "EXT. IN" at GUI menu "Manual Setup" – "Audio Setup" – "EXT. IN Setup" (page 31).

About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both Surround speakers A and B

If "Small" is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the same as when "Small" is set for both A and B.

HDMI Setup Make settings for HDMI video/audio output. Menu tree Manual Setup HDMI Setup 1 i/p Scaler 2 Resolution 3 Progressive Mode 4 Aspect 5 Color Space 6 RGB Range 7 Auto Lip Sync 8 Audio 9 Monitor Out

[Selectable items] A to H A to H & H to H OFF

A to H & H to H setting

- Deep color (10 bit/12 bit) signals are converted into 8-bit signals.

- The i/p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer's resolution signals are input.

[Selectable items] Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p

This can be set when "ip Scaler" is set to anything other than "OFF".

NOTE

• It is not possible to convert "1080i" signals into "720p" format.
• It is not possible to convert "720p" signals into "1080i" format.

[Selectable items] Auto Video1 Video2

This can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "OFF"

[Selectable items] Full Normal

This can be set when "i/p Scaler" is set to anything other than "OFF".

[Selectable items] YCbCr RGB

When connected to a monitor with a DVI-D connector (HDCP compatible) using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, the signals are output in RGB format, regardless of this setting.

[Selectable items] Normal Enhanced

When "YCbCr" is selected under "Color Space", "RGB Range" will have no effect.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

[Selectable items] Amp TV

[Selectable items] Auto (Dual) Monitor 1 Monitor 2

- When "Monitor Out" is set to "Auto [Dual]", connections with the MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 connectors are recognized automatically.

- If both the MONITOR 1 and 2 connectors are connected and "Resolution" is set to "Auto", the signals are output with a resolution compatible with both monitors.

- If "Resolution" is set to something other than "Auto", check the resolutions with which your monitor is compatible at GUI menu "Information" - "HDMI Information" - "Monitor 1" and "Monitor 2" and set accordingly (page 48).

NOTE

Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not be correct when you set to "Auto (Dual)". In such a case, set to either "Monitor 1" or "Monitor 2".

Audio Setup Make settings for audio playback. Menu tree Manual Setup Audio Setup 1 EXT.IN Setup 2 2ch Direct/Stereo 3 Downmix Option 4 Auto Surround Mode 5 Manual EQ

Surround Speaker

Select the surround speakers to use.

[Selectable items] A B A+B

Subwoofer Level

Set the subwoofer level for playback.

Select according to the player in use.

[Selectable items] 0dB +5dB +10dB +15dB

We recommend setting to "+15 dB".

2 2ch Direct/Stereo

Make speaker settings for 2-channel mode playback.

Setting

To change the settings, select "Custom".

[Selectable items] Basic * Custom

*: Use the same settings as in "Speaker Setup".

Front

Select front speaker size.

[Selectable items] Large Small

Subwoofer

Select subwoofer use.

[Selectable items] Yes No

Subwoofer Mode

Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.

[Selectable items] LFE LFE+Main

Crossover

Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal.

[Selectable items] 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz

Distance FL

Set distance from listening position to front left speaker.

[Variable range] 0.0ft \~ 60.0ft

Distance FR

Set distance from listening position to front right speaker.

[Variable range] 0.0ft \~ 60.0ft

3 Downmix Option

Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital sources.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

- Set this to "ON" if the sound from the front speakers seems distorted.

- When not using the center speaker or surround speakers, the playback sound is down-mixed and output from the front speakers.

4 Auto Surround Mode

Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each input signal type.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

- The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed below.

① Analog and PCM 2-channel signals

② Doloy Digital and DTS 2-channel signals

③ Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals

④ Multi-channel signals other than Doloy Digital and DTS (PCM, DSD, etc.)

- When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed.

5 Manual EQ

Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer.

Adjust CH

Select speaker adjustment method.

[Selectable items] Each L/R All

Manual EQ

Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level.

[Selectable items] 63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k

8k 16k

[Variable range] -20dB \~ 0dB \~ +6dB

Curve Copy

Copy "Audyssey Flat" curve from Room EQ.

[Selectable items] Yes No

"Curve Copy" is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been performed.

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Network Setup Make network settings. Menu tree Manual Setup Network Setup 1 Network Setup 2 Other 3 Network Information

• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need to make the settings at "Setting the IP Address" and "Setting the Proxy", since the DHCP function is set to "ON" in the AVR-4308CI's default settings.
• If the AVR-4308CI is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network administrator.
• If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings (37 page 20).
• If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

These are systems by which the IP address and other network settings are automatically set for the AVR-4308CI, computer, broadband router and network devices.

• DNS (Domain Name System)

This is a system for converting the domain names used when browsing Internet sites (for example, "www.denon.jp") into the IP addresses actually used for communications (for example, "202.221.192.106").

1 Network Setup

Make settings for wired or wireless LAN.

Wired LAN settings

Use this procedure to configure the Wired LAN settings.

1 Connect the LAN cable ( page 20).

Turn on the AVR-4308CI (page 49).

Z AVR-430BCI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.

When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in step 3.

3 Set the IP address at the GUI menu "Manual Setup" "Network Setup" – "Network Setup".

NETWORK SETLP DHCP ON IP Address 102.168.11.3 ① Select "Detail". ② Set "OFF". ③ Input the address. NETWORK SETLP IP Address 102.168.011.003 Default Mask 265.255.255.000 Default Gateway 000.000.000.000 Primary DNS 000.000.000.000 Secondary DNS 000.000.000.000 Primary DNS 000.000.000.000 ④ Select "Exit". Get IP address manually BIME Cancel

① Select "Detail" and press the ENTER button.

② Use the ◀▷ button to set "DHCP" to "OFF", then press the ▼ button.

The DHCP function is disabled.

③ Use the ▷ button to input the address and press the ENTER button.

IP Address

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.

CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255

CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255

CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 \~ 192.168.255.255

Subnet Mask

When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to the AVR-4308CI, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address,

Primary DNS Secondary DNS

If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at "Primary DNS". If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the first one at "Secondary DNS".

④ Use the ▽ button to select "Exit" and press the ENTER button. Setup is complete.

※ When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select "Proxy" and press the ENTER button ( page 35 "Proxy settings").

Wireless LAN settings

Use this procedure to configure the Wireless LAN settings.

1 Fitting a rod antenna (page 20).

※ If a LAN cable is connected, remove it.

2 Turn on the AVR-4308CI ( page 49).

3 Set the access point at the GUI menu "Manual Setup" – "Network Setup" – "Network Setup".

When searching access points to connect automatically, refer to "Automatic settings".

When searching access points to connect manually, refer to "Manual settings".

□ Automatic settings

NETWORK SETUP Automatically search for access ① Select "Search". DenON Start search ② Select the access point. Example) DENON Network Please select access point to connect. Comp 1 DENON 000008579F34 None 0% ##m# Search Power OK/Cancel Select access point to comment

① Select "Search" and press the ENTER button. The access point you have set is displayed.

② Use the button to select the access point, and then press the ENTER button.

※If the access points are not detected automatically, use the ▼ button to select the "Manual" and press the ENTER button. Setting becomes manual. For details, see "Manual settings" (IF page 34, 35).

NETWORK SETUP Please select access point to a DENON 00008579F34 Select when access points cannot be set automatically. Network Setup Enter Cancel

※ If the access points are repeat search, use the ▽ button to select the "Search" and press the ENTER button.

NETWORK SETUP DENON Please select access point to connect. DENON 00000578F34 Select when search access points again Report search Enter Cancel

③ If there is an encryption setting for the access point you selected in step ②, enter same encryption key as used for the access point. If there is no encryption setting, proceed to step ⑤.

NETWORK SETUP Enter same encryption key (security) key as up for access point ③ Enter encryption key. NET Key Default Key Connection ④ Set only during "WEP" in step ②. t "Connection".

Use the △▽◀▷ button to input the "Key" (encryption key) and press the ENTER button,

Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point.

[Characters that can be input]

When no security settings have been used in the Internet connection settings, this step is not necessary.

④ When encryption is by "WEP", select the "Default Key" using the ▽ button, and then press the ◀ ➤ button.

[Selectable items] 1 2 3 4

Select the same default key as used for the access point. This should normally be set to "1".

⑤ Use the button to select "Connection" and press the ENTER button.

Network connection starts.

When connection is established with the access point, "Connection completed." is displayed.

NETWORK SETUP DENON Connection completed: SHOP ON IP Address 192.158.11.3 OK Cancel Termiseate setup Enter

AVR-4308CI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.

When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in step 4.

□ Manual settings

NETWORK SETUP Automatically search for access point to connect ① Select "Detail". ② Select the communication mode. Examples Infrastructure ③ Input the SSID. ④ Select the encryption method. Example WEP ⑤ Enter encryption key. ⑥ Set only during "WEP" in step ④. ⑦ Select "Connection".

① Select "Detail" and press the ENTER button.

② Use the ◀ ▷ button to select the Mode and press the ▽ button.

[Selectable items]

Infrastructure : Select when communication is via an access point.

Ad-hoc : Select during direct communication, when an access point is not used.

③ Use the button to input the name of the wireless network (SSID) and press the ENTER button.

[Characters that can be input]

A\~Z a\~z 0\~9 !" # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; <= > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

④ Use the button to select the Security and press the button.

[Selectable items]

None

Select if not encrypted.

Can also be used even without encryption, through we recommend encryption for improved security.

WEP WPA-PSK(TKIP) WPA-PSK(AES) WPA2-PSK(TKIP)

WPA2-PSK(AES)

Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using.

⑤ Use the button to input the "Key" lencryption keyl and press the ENTER button.

Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point.

[Characters that can be input]

A-Z a-z 0-9 !" #% &'( ) * + , - . / : ;<=> ? @ [ \ ] (space)

When no security settings have been used in the Internet connection settings, this step is not necessary.

⑥ When encryption is by "WEP", select the "Default Key" using the ▽ button, and then press the ◀ ▷ button.

[Selectable items] 1 2 3 4

Select the same default key as used for the access point. This should normally be set to "1".

⑦ Use the button to select "Connection" and press the ENTER button.

Network connection starts.

When connection is established with the access point, "Connection completed," is displayed.

3D NETWORK SETUP DENON Connection completed. DHCP ON IP Address 192.158.11.3 Exit Detail Terminate setup Enter

AVR-4308CI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.

When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in step 4.

4 Set the IP address.

※ For details, see page 32, 33 "Wired LAN settings" in step 3.

If you are using a router with no DHCP function to automatically assign the IP address, set the IP address manually.

□ Proxy settings

Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.

NETWORK SETUP AUTOMATICALLY SEARCH FOR ACCESS POINT TO CONNECT ① Select "Detail". Network Setup DNCP IP Address 392 198 000 007 Subset Mask 395 Default Gateway 392 Primary DNS 392 198 000 007 Secondary DNS 8 000 000 000 Primary Exit ② Select "Proxy". NETWORK SETUP [3/2] DENON

④ Selecting the input method. Example1 Address ⑤ Input the address or domain name. ⑥ Input the port number. ③ Set "ON". TIP RESET Proxy Address Port Exit Proxy server Cancel ⑦ Select "Exit".

① On the GUI menu, select "Manual Setup" - "Network Setup"
- "Network Setup" - "Detail" and press the ENTER button.
② Use the △▽ button to set "Proxy" and press the ENTER button.
③ Use the ◀ ▷ button to set "Proxy" to "ON" and press the ▽
button.

The proxy server is enabled.

④ Use the ◀ ▷ button to select the proxy server input method, and then press the ▽ button.

[Selectable items]

Address : Select when inputting by address.

Name : Select when inputting by domain name.

⑤ Use the ▷ button to input the proxy server address or domain name and press the ENTER button.

When "Address" is selected in step ④:

Input the address

When "Name" is selected in step ④

Input the domain name

[Characters that can be input]

A\~Z a\~z 0\~9 !" # % & ' ( ) * + , . / : ; <= > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

⑥ Use the △▽◀▷ button to input the proxy server port number and press the ENTER button.
⑦ Use the ▽ button to select "Exit" and press the ENTER button. Setup is complete.

2 Other

Make setting for amp power save mode and computer language environment.

Power Saving

Make setting for power saving when not connected to network.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Character

Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3-Tag played by USB.

[Selectable items] Auto Latin Japanese

If the characters are not properly displayed when set to "Auto", set to "Latin" or "Japanese".

PC Language

Select computer environment language.

[Selectable items] ara	chi (smpI)			chi (trad)		cze	dan
	dut	eng	fin	fre	ger	gre	heb
	hun	ita	jpn	kor	nor	pol	por
	por (BR)		rus	spa	swe	tur

3 Network Information

Display network information

[Items to be checked]	Wired or Wireless	SSID
	DHCP=ON or OFF	IP Address
	MAC Address

Zone Setup Make settings for audio playback in a multi- zone system. Menu tree Manual Setup Zone Setup 1 ZONE2 2 ZONE3

1 ZONE2 Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system. 2 ZONE3 Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system.

Bass

Adjust low frequency range (bass).

[Variable range] -10dB \~ 0dB \~ +10dB

Treble

Adjust high frequency range (treble).

[Variable range] -10dB \~ 0dB \~ +10dB

HPF

When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies, distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting "HPF" "ON".

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Lch Level

Adjust the left channel output level.

[Variable range] -12dB \~ 0dB \~ +12dB

Rch Level

Adjust the right channel output level.

[Variable range] -12dB \~ 0dB \~ +12dB

Channel

Switch between stereo and mono output.

[Selectable items] Stereo Mono

When GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "Amp Assign" (page 37) is set to "ZONE (MONO)", "Bi-Wiring & ZONE (MONO)" or "ZONE2/3 (MONO)", the "Channel" setting is automatically set to "Mono".

Volume Level

Adjust the main volume level.

[Selectable items] Variable -40dB 0dB

"Variable" is displayed when a power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 output channel at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "Amp Assign" (page 37).

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

[Selectable items] OFF -20dB -10dB 0dB

Power On Level

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

[Selectable items] Last --- -70dB \~ 18dB

Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

[Selectable items] Full -40dB -20dB

Option Setup Make various other settings. Menu tree Manual Setup Option Setup 1 Amp Assign 2 Volume Control 3 Source Delete 4 GUI 5 Quick Select Name 6 Trigger Out 1 7 Trigger Out 2 8 Digital Out 9 Remote ID 10 2Way Remote 11 Dimmer 12 Setup Lock 13 Maintenance Mode 14 Firmware Update 15 Add New Feature

1 Amp Assign

Define how the amplifier for the surround and/or surround back speaker channels is used.

The places where the surround amplifier and surround back amplifier are used can be set freely according to the usage environment. This makes it possible to output sound to rooms other than the room (the MAIN ZONE) where surround playback is performed (multi-zone playback) or play the sound with high quality using the front speakers (bi-wiring/bi-amp connections).

[Selectable items]

For details, see "Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations" ( page 72 - 75).

2 Volume Control

Set the main zone volume setting.

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

[Selectable items] OFF -20dB -10dB 0dB

Power On Level

This sets the volume set when the main zone's power is turned on.

[Selectable items] Last --- -80dB \~ +18dB

Mute Level

This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute mode is set in the main zone.

[Selectable items] Full -40dB -20dB

3 Source Delete

Remove input sources that are not used from the display.

[Selectable items] ON Delete

NOTE

• Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.
• Input sources set to "Delete" cannot be selected from GUI menu
  "Source Select" or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit.

4 GUI

Make GUI related settings.

Screensaver

Make screensaver settings. Use the screensaver to prevent burn-in on the monitor screen. When set to "ON", the screensaver is activated if there is no activity for about 3 minutes.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Wall Paper

Change the GUI background.

[Selectable items] Picture Black Gray Blue

Format

Select the video output signal format to match the monitor.

[Selectable items] NTSC PAL

NOTE

When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Use the procedure described below to change the video format.

Operating from the main unit

① Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3 seconds.
"Video Format" appears on the display.
② Use the ◀ ▷ button to make the setting.
③ Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.

*Video Format < NTSC >

Text

Text information display.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Master Volume

Master volume display during adjustment.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

NET/USB / iPod / Tuner

This sets the time the on-screen display is displayed when an operation is performed.

[Selectable items] Always 30s 10s OFF

5 Quick Select Name

Change the Quick Select name.

Up to 16 characters can be input

[Input characters] A \~ Z a \~ z 0 \~ 9 ! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; <= > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

6 Trigger Out 1

Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with respect to the zone, input source, surround mode, HDMI monitor, etc.

For details about the trigger out function, see page 21.

7 Trigger Out 2

This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2, in the same way as "Trigger Out 1" above.

[Selectable items] ON

Setting with Respect to the Zone

• When the power of the zone turned or/off, the trigger out turns on.
• Associated with the power supply of zones set to "ON".

Setting with Respect to the Input Source

- When the input source set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.

- Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to "ON" at "Setting with Respect to the Zone".

Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode

• When the surround mode set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.
• Associated with respect to surround modes that are set to "ON".
• This can be set if the "MAIN ZONE" setting at "Setting with Respect to the Zone" is set to "ON".
• Associated when an input source for which "Setting with Respect to the Input Source" is set to "ON" is selected.

Setting with Respect to the Monitor

• When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected, the trigger cut turns on.
• Associated with respect to HDMI monitor that are set to "ON".
• This can be set if the "MAIN ZONE" setting at "Setting with Respect to the Zone" is set to "ON".
• Associated when an input source for which "Setting with Respect to the Input Source" is set to "ON" is selected.

8 Digital Out

Set usage of OPT3 OUT.

[Selectable items]

ZONE4 Select

Rec Select

NOTE

The ZONE4 operations cannot be performed when set to "Rec Select".

9 Remote ID

Set remote control ID.

Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the receiver.

[Selectable items]

• When changing the remote ID, also change the "AMP", "iPod", "TU" and NET/DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time (page 67).
• When changing the remote ID, also change the sub remote control unit at the same time (page 72).

10 2Way Remote

Make setting for 2-way remote control unit.

[Selectable items]

Used Not Us

d

When using a 2-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI and RC-7001RCI, sold separately), set this to "Used".

11 Dimmer

Adjust display brightness of the receiver.

[Selectable items]

Bright Dim

Dark OFF

Operating from the main unit

Press the DIMMER button.

12 Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent change.

[Selectable items]

- When "Setup Lock" is set to "ON", the settings listed below can no longer be changed. Also, "SETUP LOCKED!" is displayed if you attempt to operate related buttons.

- GUI menu operations

- RESTORER

- Night Mode

Parameter

Room EQ

Channel Level

Audio Delay

- To cancel the setting, press the MENU button to re-display the "Setup Lock" screen, then change the setting to "OFF".

13 Maintenance Mode

This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson or installer. (For professional use only.)

This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the AVR-4308CI's status and make settings via the Internet.

NOTE

Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer.

14 Firmware Update

Update the firmware of the receiver.

Check for Update

You can check for fi mware updates. You can also check approximately how long it will take to complete an update.

Start

Execute the update process.

When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed.

When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed.

※ If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update again.

Display Description

Updating failed Updating failed.

Login failed Failure to log into server

Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.

Connection fail Failure connecting to server.

15 Add New Feature

Display the new functions (payment required) which can be purchased for downloading to the AVR-4308CI and upgrade.

When you purchase a new function and register your user information, "Registered" is displayed on this menu and you can proceed with the upgrade.

When "Not Registered" is displayed on the Add New Feature screen, you cannot upgrade.

To use the upgrade function, you should purchase an upgrade package from the DENON website.

To purchase the package, you will need the ID number shown on this screen.

To display the ID number on the screen, hold the <> and buttons down for 3 seconds or more.

Upgrade

Execute the upgrade process.

When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed.

When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed.

※ If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in "Firmware Update" will appear on the display, check the settings and network environment, then update again.

Upgrade Status

A list of the additional functions provided by the Upgrade will be displayed.

Notes concerning use of "Firmware Update" and "Add New Feature"

• In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection.
• Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
• Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be completed.
  Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on the AVR-4308CI cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is completed.
  Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters, etc., set for the AVR-4308CI.

Information regarding the "Firmware Update" function and "Add New Feature" will be announced on the DENON web site each time related plans are defined.

Language This sets the language used on the display screens. Menu tree Manual Setup Language

[Selectable items]

English Français

Operating from the main unit

① Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3 seconds.
"Video Format" appears on the display.
② Use the button to set "GUI Language".
② Use the ◀ ▷ button to make the setting
③ Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.

*GUI Language < ENGLISH >

Source Select

Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings related to playing input sources.

Input Source Selection

Menu tree Source Select TUNER PHONO CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX NET/USB XM HD Radio

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

[Operation on the main unit]

Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob.

※ If "Rec Select" or "Video Select" is selected for the input source, press the SOURCE button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob.

[Operation on the main remote control unit]

Press the SOURCE SELECT button.

The desired input source can be selected directly.

(Main unit)

(Main remote control unit)

To operate the AVR-4308CI using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the AMP mode (IC) page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations").

Settings Related to Playing Input Sources Menu tree Source Select TUNER 1 Play 2 Auto Preset 3 Preset Skip 4 Preset Name 5 Input Mode 6 Rename 7 Other PHONO 5 Input Mode 6 Rename 7 Other CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX 1 Play* 2 Playback Mode (iPod)* 3 Assign 5 Input Mode 6 Rename 7 Other NET/USB 1 Play 2 Playback Mode 3 Still Picture 5 Input Mode 6 Rename 7 Other

graph TD
    A["Source Select"] --> B["XM"]
    B --> C1["Play"]
    B --> C2["Preset Skip"]
    B --> C3["Antenna Alming"]
    B --> C4["Input Mode"]
    B --> C5["Rename"]
    B --> C6["Other"]
    D["HD Radio"] --> E1["Play"]
    D --> E2["Auto Preset"]
    D --> E3["Preset Skip"]
    D --> E4["Preset Name"]
    D --> E5["Input Mode"]
    D --> E6["Rename"]
    D --> E7["Other"]

* : "Play" and "Playback Mode (iPod)" are displayed for input sources for which "iPod dock" is assigned.

[Input source] TUNER NET/USB XM HD Radio (iPod)

[Input source] TUNER HD Radio

[Selectable items] Start

If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.

A\~G

Select the preset channel(s) you do not want to display.

[Selectable items] ON Skip

When set to "All" to "Skip", it is possible to skip entire preset memory blocks (A to G).

4 Preset Name

Assign name to a preset memory. Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.

A1 \~ G8

Select the preset memory number.

[Input source] TUNER HD Radio

[Characters that can be input]

A\~Z a\~z 0\~9 ! " # % & ' ( ) * +, -, /::<=> ? @ [ \ ] (space)

5 Input Mode

Make input mode and decode mode settings for this source.

The selectable input modes depend on the input source and "Assign" setting ( page 42).

Input Mode

Set the input mode for this source.

[Input source]

[Selectable items]

Analog EXT.IN

[Input source]

[Selectable items]

Auto EXT.IN

[Input source]

[Selectable items]

- When a digital signal is properly input, the "DIG" indicator lights on the display. If the DIG indicator does not light, check the digital input connector assignment and the connections.

- The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to "EXT, IN"

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button on the main remote control unit.

*1: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu "Assign" setting is set to "HDMI" (page 42). Excluding CD.

*2: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu "Assign" setting is set to "Digital" (Xpage 42).

Decode Mode

Set the decode mode for this source.

[Input source] CD

[Selectable items]

• This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu "Assign" setting is set to "HDMI" or "Digital" (1 page 42).
• Only set "PCM" and "DTS" when playing the respective signals.

6 Rename

Change the display name for this source. Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.

[Characters that can be input]

A\~Z a\~z 0\~9 !" # % & '() * +,-./::<=> ? @ [ \ ] (space)

7 Other

Make various other settings.

Video Select

Switch video input source while listening to audio signal.

[Selectable items]

Operating from the main unit

Press the VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob until the desired picture appears.
※ To cancel, press the main unit's VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the main unit's SOURCE SELECT knob and select "SOURCE".

NOTE

• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
• When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output
• Input sources for which "Delete" is selected at "Source Delete cannot be selected.

Video Convert

Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format.

NOTE

When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to "OFF".

Source Level

Corrects the playback level of the selected input source's audio input.

For input sources for which "HDMI" or "Digital" are set at the GUI menu "Assign" setting, the analog input level and digital input level can be set separately.

8 Playback Mode (iPod)

Make settings for "iPod" playback.

Repeat

Make settings for repeat mode.

Shuffle

Make settings for shuffle mode.

This can be selected for input sources for which "Assign" is assigned at the "iPod dock" setting.

9 Assign

Assign input sources to input connectors.

HDMI
Select HDMI connector to assign to this source.

[Input source]

DVD

HDP

TV/CBL

SAT

VCR

DVD

HDP

TV/CBL

SAT

VCR

DVR

V.AUX

[Selectable items]

1

2

3

4

None

Input source	DVD HDI TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR VAUX
Default setting	HDMI1	HDMI2	HDMI3	None	None	HDMI4	None

• With HDMI, the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously. To play the video signal assigned at "HDMI" combined with the audio signal assigned at "Digital", select "Digital" at GUI menu "Input Mode" (IF) page 41).
• When the AVR-4308CI and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
• The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors are not output to the monitor.

NOTE

This cannot be set for input sources for which "iPod dock" is assigned.

Digital

Select digital input connector to assign to this source.

[Input source]

CD	DVD	HDP	TV/CBL	SAT
VCR	DVR	V.AUX

[Selectable items]

Coaxial1 ~ 3	Optical1 ~ 4
DENON LINK	* None

Input source	CD	DVD	HOP	TV/CBL	SAT	VCR	DVR	VAUX
Default setting	Coaxial 3	Coaxial 1	None	Coaxial 2	Optical 1	Optical 3	Optical 2	Optical 4

*: When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected, be sure to make a setting to "DENON LINK".

NOTE

- This cannot be set for input sources for which "iPod dock" is assigned.

- When an input source to which "DENON LINK" has been assigned is selected in the MAIN ZONE, the PCM signal and network audio signal (Internet radio, music server or USB) input from the digital input connector cannot be output to the analog REC OUT connector or multizone.

Component

Select component video input to assign to this source.

[Input source]

DVD	HDP	TV/CBL	SAT	VCR
DVR	V.AUX

[Selectable items]

1

2

3

None

Input source	DVD HOP TV/CBL		SAT VCR DVR VAUX
Default setting	Component 1	Component 2	Component 3	None	None	None	None

NOTE

This cannot be set for input sources for which "iPod dock" is assigned.

iPod dock

Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source.

[Input source]

CD	DVD	HDP	TV/CBL	SAT	VCR
DVR	V.AUX

[Selectable items]

Assign None

• With the default settings, the Control Dock for iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
• Even if "iPod dock" is set to "Assign", if the set is not connected to a Control dock for iPod, the input source can be used as the normal input source.

10 Playback Mode

Make settings for "NET/USB" playback.

[Input source]

NET/USB

USB Select

Select USB port to use.

[Selectable items] Front Rear

Match the port to be used and the setting.

Repeat

Make settings for repeat mode.

[Selectable items]

All

One

OFF

Random

Make random mode settings.

[Selectable items]

ON

OFF

Direct Play

Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items]

Favorites

All Music

11 Still Picture

Make settings for still picture (JPEG) playback.

[Input source]

Slide Show

Make slideshow settings.

[Selectable items]

Interval

Set the playback time per image.

[Variable range]

12 Antenna Aiming

Adjust the XM radio reception sensitivity.

[Input source]

Satellite

Indicate satellite signal strength.

Terrestrial

Indicate terrestrial signal strength.

Display	Condition
	Signal strength is strong
	Signal strength is good
	Signal strength is marginal
	Signal strength is weak
	No signal

Surround Modes

Standard Playback

This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound according to the program source.

Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources

To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main unit and main remote control unit, press the STANDARD button. The mode switches each time the button is pressed.

- When using a surround back speaker

[Selectable items]

DOLBY PLIIx

DTS NEO:6

neural

- When not using a surround back speaker

[Selectable items]

DOLBY PLII

DTS NEO:6

neural

DOLBY PLIIx or DOLBY PLII

:The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLIIx or DOLBY PLII for playback.

This mode is suited for movie sources.

This mode is suited for music sources.

This mode is suited for games.

: This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLII decoder. When this mode is selected, "DOLBY PL" is displayed.

DTS NEO:6

: The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for playback.

This mode is suited for movie sources.

This mode is suited for music sources.

neural

It is possible to play analog input signals and PCM (2-channel, 48kHz or less) in the surround mode. This is the optimum mode for playing sources recorded in XM HD Surround ( page 79).

Select the "Cinema", "Music", "Game" and "Pro Logic" modes at GUI menu "Parameter" - "Audio" - "Surround Parameters" - "Mode" (page 44).

Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)

[Selectable items]

STANDARD

This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format and playing surround sound.

The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the input signal and surround back output playback mode.

Input signal Display
Dolby Digital Source	DOLBY DIGITAL (other than 2ch) / DOLBY DIGITAL EX	DOLBY DIGITAL
		DOLBY DIGITAL EX
		DOLBY DIGITAL+PLIIx CINEMA
		DOLBY DIGITAL+PLIIx MUSIC
	DOLBY DIGITAL Plus	DOLBY DIGITAL +
	DOLBY TrueHD	DOLBY TrueHD
DTS Surround Source	DTS (6.1ch) / DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 / DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 / DTS 96/24	DTS SURROUND
		DTS+PLIIx CINEMA
		DTS+PLIIx MUSIC
		DTS+NFO.6
		DTS ES MTRX6.1 (*1)
		DTS ES DSCR76.1 (*2)
		DTS 96/24 (*3)
	DTS-HD High Resolution Audio	DTS-HD HI RES
	DTS-HD Master Audio	DTS-HD MSTR
DVD-Audio, SACD	PCM (multi ch) / DSD (multi ch)	MULTI CH IN
		MULTI IN+PLIIx CINEMA
		MULTI IN+PLIIx MUSIC
		MULTI CH IN 7.1

*1: This is displayed when the input signal is "DTS-ES Matrix 6.1"

and the AVR-4308CI's "AFDM" setting is set to "ON"

*2: This is displayed when the input signal is "DTS-ES Discrete 6.1".

*3: This is displayed when the input signal is "DTS 96/24".

For details, see page 82.

DSP Simulation Playback

The desired mode according to the program source and viewing situation can be selected from among 10 DENON original surround modes.

The surround parameters can be adjusted (page 80, 81) to achieve an even more realistic, powerful sound field.

[Selectable items]

7CH STEREO

WIDE SCREEN

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTUAL

This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.

This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of viewing a movie on a large screen.

This mode is suited for viewing sports programs.

This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in an arena.

This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in a jazz club.

This mode is for appreciating classical concert programs.

This mode is for playing monaural movie sources with surround sound.

This mode is suited for achieving surround sound with video games.

This mode lets you add a sense of expansion to stereo music sources.

This mode is for enjoying surround effects using only the front speakers or headphones.

*: When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO MOVIE mode, the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right), so input to both channels.

- To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main unit or main remote control unit, press the [SIMULATION] button. The mode switches each time the button is pressed.

- Depending on the program source being played, it may not be possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes.

Stereo Playback

[Selectable items]

STEREO

This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted. Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.

Direct Playback

[Selectable items]

DIRECT

In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high quality sound.

The sound is output to the same channels as the input signal. The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input signal.

For multi-channel sources, the display depends on the surround back output's play mode.

Input signal	Display
Analog signal /PCM (2ch) /Dolby Digital source /DTS source /Other 2-channel digital signals	DIRECT
DSD (2ch) DSD DIRECT	T (*)
PCM (multi ch)	MULTI CH DIRECT
	M DIRECT + PLIIx CINEMA
	M DIRECT + PLIIx MUSIC
	M DIRECT 7.1
DSD (multi ch) DSD MULTI DIRECT ( *)

* : When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the audio parameters and speaker settings, "DIRECT" or "MULTI CH DIRECT" is displayed.

For details, see page 83.

Playback in the Pure Direct Mode

This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully, providing extremely high quality sound.

Press the PURE DIRECT button.

• When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI screen is not displayed and the display on the main unit is turned off.
• If the HDMI input connector is selected, video outputs are output in the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.

Parameter GUI

Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on the main remote control unit.

Audio Adjust various audio parameters. Menu tree Parameter Audio 1 Surround Parameters 2 Tone 3 Room EQ 4 RESTORER 5 Night Mode 6 Audio Delay

1 Surround Parameters

Adjust surround sound parameters. The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround modes (1-2 page 80, 81).

Mode

Select the mode according to the playback source.

[Selectable items]

In the PLLIx or PLLI mode:

Cinema Music Game

Pro Logic *

In the DTS NEO:6 mode:

Cinema Music

*: Can be selected in the PLII mode.

The "Music" mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music.

Cinema EQ

Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

DRC

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

[Selectable items] Auto Low Middle High OFF

This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.

D.COMP

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

[Selectable items] OFF Low Middle High

When playing DTS sources, this is only displayed for compatible software.

LFE

Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).

[Variable range] -10dB \~ 0dB

For proper playback of the different program sources, we recommend setting to the values below.

• Dolby Digital sources: "0 dB"

• DTS movie sources: "0 dB"

• DTS music sources: "-10 dB"

Center Image

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.

[Variable range] 0.0 \~ 0.3 \~ 1.0

Panorama

Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Dimension

Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance.

[Variable range] 0 \~ 3 \~ 6

Center Width

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.

[Variable range] 0 \~ 3 \~ 7

Delay Time

Adjust delay time to control sound stage size.

[Variable range] 0 ms \~ 30 ms \~ 300 ms

Effect

Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Effect Level

Adjust effect signal level.

[Variable range] 1 \~ 10 \~ 15

Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural.

Room Size

Determine size of acoustic environment.

[Selectable items] Small Medium small Medium

Medium large Large

NOTE

"Room Size" does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.

AFDM

Auto-select surround mode by source.

This function only works for software containing a special identification signal.

If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES, it is played in 6.1-channels. If not, it is played in 5.1-channels.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

Example : Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX flag)

- When "AFDM" is set to "ON", the surround mode is automatically set to the DOLBY D + PLIIx C mode.

- To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode, set "AFDM" to "OFF" and "SB CH Out" to "MTRX ON".

Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags. If the playback mode does not switch automatically even when "AFDM" is set to "ON", set "SB CH Out" to "MTRX ON" or "PLIIx CINEMA".

SB CH Out (for Multi-channel sources)

Select playback mode for surround back channels.

[Selectable items]

NON MTRX MTRX ON PLIIx CINEMA *1 PLIIx MUSIC *2

ES MTRX *3 ES DSCRT *4 DSCRT ON OFF

*1: This can be selected when "Surround Back" is set to "2spkrs" at the GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Speaker Setup" - "Speaker Configuration" setting (page 28).

*2: This can be selected when "Surround Back" is set to "2spkrs" or "1spkr" at the GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Speaker Setup" - "Speaker Configuration" setting.

*3: This can be selected when playing DTS sources.

*4: This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a discrete 6.1-channel signal identification signal.

When using the surround back speaker, you can change the "SB CH Out" setting by pressing the STANDARD button.

SB CH Out (for 2-channel sources)

Determine whether to use surround back speakers.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

Subwoofer Att.

Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN mode.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

Set this to "ON" if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when playing Super Audio CD.

Subwoofer

Turn subwoofer output on and off.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Default

Resets the settings to the default values.

Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.

Tone Defeat

Tum tone adjustments off.

ON OFF[Selectable items]

The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT mode.

Bass

Adjust low frequency range (bassi).

[Variable range] -6dB \~ +6dB

Treble

Adjust high frequency range (treble)

[Variable range] -6dB \~ +6dB

"Bass" and "Treble" can be set when "Tone Defeat" is set to "OFF".

3 Room EQ

Select room equalizer for current environment.

[Selectable items]

Audyssey

Audyssey Byp. L/R

: Optimize frequency response of all speakers.

:Optimize frequency response of speakers except front L and R speakers.

Audyssey Flat

: Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat response.

Manual

: Apply frequency response set with "Manual EQ" (page 32).

OFF

: Turn equalizer off.

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the main remote control.

When "Audyssey" is selected, "AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT" lights. When "Audyssey Byp. L/R" or "Audyssey Flat" is selected, or when the auto setup measuring results have changed, "AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT" lights.

• "Audyssey", "Audyssey Byp. L/R" and "Audyssey Flat" can be selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed.
• If the settings of the speakers for which "None" has been determined at "Auto Setup" are changed, "Audyssey", "Audyssey Byp. L/R" and "Audyssey Flat" cannot be selected and measurements have to be taken again to include the newly-added speakers.
• When using headphones, "Room EQ" is always set to "OFF".

4 RESTORER

This function restores compressed audio signals to how they were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of the bass and treble to obtain richer playback sound.

[Selectable items]

OFF

Mode1 (RESTORER 64)

Mode2 (RESTORER 96)

Mode3 (RESTORER HQ)

The default setting for "NET/USB" and "iPod" is "Mode3". All others are set to "OFF".

Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit

During playback, press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the RSTR button on the main remote control unit.

When set to something other than "OFF", RESTOBER is played.

About the RESTORER function

• Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audiol and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the base to obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals.
• This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input source is set to "XM", "HD Radio" or "NET/USB", or when analog signals (including AM/FM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) are input.

5 Night Mode Optimized setting for late-night listening. [Selectable items] OFF Low Middle High Operating from the main remote control unit Press the NGT button. The "NIGHT" bater lights when "Low", "Middle" or "High" is selected. OFF Low Midella High

6 Audio Delay Compensate for mismatched timing between video and audio. Delay audio. This sets the delay time for audio signals. [Variable range] 0 ms ~ 200 ms

Operating from the main remote control unit ① Press the A.DL button. ② Use the ◀▶ button to set. • This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT. IN, DIRECT STEREO mode (with "Front" set to "Large", "Tone Defeat" to "ON" and "Room EQ" to "OFF"). • The adjustment range is 0 to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync Correction function is activated.

Picture Adjust Adjust the picture quality. Menu tree Parameter Picture Adjust 1 Contrast 2 Brightness 3 Chroma Level 4 Hue 1 Contrast Adjust picture contrast. [Variable range] -6 ~ 0 ~ +6

2 Brightness Adjust picture brightness. [Variable range] 0 ~ +12 3 Chroma Level Adjust picture chroma level (saturation). [Variable range] -6 ~ 0 ~ +6

4 Hue Adjust color hue. [Variable range] -6 ~ 0 ~ +6

Information Status Shows information about current settings. Menu tree Information Status 1 MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE2/3/4

MAIN ZONE Shows information about settings for main zone. The items displayed differ according to the input source. [Items to be checked] Select Source Name Surround Mode Input Mode Assign Room EQ Video Select Src Level Rec Select Night Mode RESTORER etc.

2 ZONE2/3/4 Shows information about settings for multi-zone. [Items to be checked] Power Select Source Volume Level

Audio Input Signal Shows information about audio input signals. Menu tree Information Audio Input Signal

[Items to be checked]

Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode is displayed.

Signal

The input signal type is displayed.

fs

The input signal's sampling frequency is displayed.

Format

The number of channels in the input signal (front, surround, LFE) is displayed.

Offset

The dialogue normalization correction value is displayed.

Flag

"MATRIX" is displayed if the input signal has undergone matrix processing, "DISCRETE" if the input signal has undergone discrete processing.

Dialogue normalization function

This is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources. This function automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.

The correction value can be checked using the STATUS button on the main unit.

The figure is the correction value when the standard level is corrected.

HDMI Information Shows information about HDMI input/output signals and monitor. Menu tree Information HDMI Information 1 Signal Information 2 Monitor1 3 Monitor2

1 Signal Information The HDMI input/output signal information is displayed. [Items to be checked] Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth 2 Monitor1 The HDMI monitor 1 information is displayed. 3 Monitor2 The HDMI monitor 2 information is displayed.

[Items to be checked] Interface Supported resol.

Auto Surround Shows information about auto surround mode settings. The surround mode for which the last memory function was used for the different input signal types is displayed. Menu tree Information Auto Surround

[Items to be checked]

Analog/PCM 2ch Digital 2ch Digital 5.1ch Multi ch

Quick Select Shows information about quick select settings. Menu tree Information 1 2 3

[Items to be checked]

Input Source Input Mode Room EQ Auto Surround Mode setting Volume Level

For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3, see page 62.

Preset Station Shows information about preset stations. Menu tree Information Preset Station A B C D E F G

[Input source] TUNER XM HD Radio NET/USB

[Items to be checked] A1 \~ G8

When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed, the set's status can be checked on the display.

SOURCE SELECT

[AMP] [POWER ON] [POWER OFF] [MASTER VOLUME] [MUTE] [TUNER] [AMP model] SOURCE SELECT [TU] [DEVICE1 model] [A ~ G] [▲▼] [MEMO] [MODE] [BAND] [CHANNEL] [1 ~ 8] [SHIFT]

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Playback

Preparations

Turning the Power On

1 Press .
The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby mode.
2 Press or [POWER ON].
The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on.

To operate the AVR-4308CI using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the AMP mode (27 page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations").

Turning the Power Off

①Press or [POWER OFF].
The power is set to the standby mode.
②Press
The power indicator turns off, and so does the power.

NOTE

Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods of time or when traveling, either press to turn off the power, or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

Operations During Playback

Adjusting the Master Volume

Either turn or press [MASTER VOLUME].

Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting)

Press [MUTE].

To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume.

Listening with Headphones

Plug the headphones into .

The sound from the speakers and pre-out connectors is automatically cut.

Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones.

Playing Video and Audio Equipment

Basic Operation

1 Prepare the equipment.

①Load the DVD, CD or other software in the player.
See the operating instructions of the respective devices.)
②To play a video device, switch the monitor input.
(See the monitor's operating instructions.)

2 To operate using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the AMP mode.

page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations")

3 Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source.

GUI : "Source Select" (page 39, 40)

A Start playback.

See the operating instructions of the respective devices.

Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts

Basic Operation

1 Either turn or press [TUNER] (AMP mode) to select "TUNER".

GUI : "Source Select" (page 39, 40)

2 To operate using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the TUNER (DEVICE1) mode.

page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations")

3 Press [BAND] to select "FM" or "AM".

4 Tune in the desired broadcast station.

① To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)

Press [MODE] to light the "AUTO" indicator on the display, then use

[▲▼] to select the station you want to hear.

② To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)

Press [MODE] to turn off the display's "AUTO" indicator, then use

[▲▼] to select the station you want to hear.

#

• It is also possible to switch to "FM" or "AM" in step 1 by pressing [TUNER].
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [▲▼] to change frequencies continuously.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "GUI" - "Tuner" (page 37).

Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.

1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.

2 Press [MEMO].

3 Press [A \~ G] to select the block in which the station is to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 \~ 8] to select the preset number.

※ The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT].

4 Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting.

The image is too blurry to recognize any text content.

• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
- Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu "Source Select" - "Tuner" - "Auto Preset" (page 40).

NOTE

Preset stations are erased by overwriting them.

Listening to Preset Stations

Operation on the Main Unit

Press , then turn to select the preset radio station.

Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit

☐ Recalling preset stations from the remote control unit

1 Press [A \~ G] to select the memory block.
2 Press [CHANNEL] or [1 8] to select the desired preset channel.

Default settings

Auto tuner presets
A1 – A8	87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 MHz
B1 – B8	520 / 600 / 1000 / 1400 / 1500 / 1710 kHz, 90.1 / 90.1 MHz
C1 – C8	90.1 MHz
D1 – D8	90.1 MHz
E1 ~ E8	90.1 MHz
F1 – F8	90.1 MHz
G1 – G8	90.1 MHz

ENTER △▽ ◀◇

[TUT] (DEVICE2 mode) [▲▼] ENTER △▼◀ [SEARCH] [SAT TU] (AMP mode) [NUMBER] [NET/DTU] (DEVICE2 mode) [▲▼] [MODE] [BAND] [DTU] (AMP mode)

About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control

Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs

About XM Radio

XM is North America's number one satellite radio company, offering an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio, comedy, children's and entertainment programming, broadcast in superior digital audio quality coast to coast. For more information, or to subscribe, U.S. customers visit xmradio.com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).

XM Ready® Legal

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM Service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

XM Ready® Subscription

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID below for reference.

Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters "I", "O", "S" or "F". Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at https://activate.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10-15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready audio system you are done.

Basic Operation

1 Either turn or press [SAT TU] (AMP mode) to select "XM".

GUI : "Source Select" (1 page 39, 40)

2 To operate using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the TUNER (DEVICE2) mode.

page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations")

Use [▲▼] to select the channel.

When the channel is tuned in, the name of the song and artist are displayed.

• The channel switches continuously when [▲▼] is pressed and held.
• XM Radio channels can be preset using the same procedure as for FM/AM stations (page 50 "Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)" and "Listening to Preset Stations").
• The artist name, song title, category and reception level can be checked by pressing .
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "GUI" - "Tuner" (page 37).

Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID

1 Either turn or press [SAT TU] (AMP mode) to select "XM".

2 Press until "SIGNAL" appears on the display. The display will switch as shown below, depending on the reception conditions.

Display	GUI	Status
GOOD		Signal strength is good
MARGINAL		Signal strength is marginal
WEAK		Signal strength is weak
NO		No signal

3 Adjust the position of the antenna until "SIGNAL: GOOD" is shown on the display.

4 Press until the channel (example: "XM001") is displayed.

5 Press [▼] and select channel 0 (XM000). The radio ID is shown on the display.

The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals can be checked at GUI menu "Source Select" - "XM" - "Antenna Aiming" (page 43).

Searching Categories

2 Use ◀▷ to select the category, then use △▽ to select the desired channel.

Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly

1 Press [SEARCH].

2 Press [NUMBER] then input the channel.

Example: Accessing channel "XM123": [1] → [2] → [3]

※ If no button is pressed within several seconds, the channel automatically switches to the one whose number has been input.

3 Press [ENTER] to set that channel. Reception switches to the selected channel.

- "LOADING" is displayed while channels or data are being received. - "UPDATING" is displayed while the encoding code is being updated.

- "XM ---" is displayed if the selected channel cannot be used.

Listening to HD Radio Stations

HD radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional FM/AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.

Using the HD Radio™ Receiver

HD Radio technology provides higher quality sound than conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services.

• FM sounds as sensational as CDs
• AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo
- A variety of "data services", including text-based information, song title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.

Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast programs.

For detailed information on HD Radio technology, please go to "www.ibiquity.com".

HD Radio®

HD Radio™ technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation, iBiquity Digital, the HD Radio logo, and the HD logo are registered trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. HD Radio™ is a trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation, U.S. and Foreign Patents.

Basic Operation

1 Either turn or press [DTU] (AMP mode) to select "IID Radio".

GUI : "Source Select" (1 page 39, 40)

2 To operate using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the NET/DTU (DEVICE2) mode.

page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations"

3 Press [BAND] to select "FM" or "AM".

4 Tune in the desired broadcast station.

①To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)

Press [MODE] to select "HD Auto" or "Auto", then use [▲▼] to select the station you want to hear.

- The "HD" indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio station is tuned in.

- When "HD Auto" (tuning mode) is selected, only HD Radio stations are tuned in.

- If "Auto" (tuning model) is selected, both HD Radio and analog stations are tuned in.

② To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)

Press [MODE] to select "Manual", then use [▲▼].

• It is also possible to switch to "FM" or "AM" at step 1 by pressing [DTU].
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [▲▼] to change frequencies continuously.
• HD Radio stations can be preset using the same procedure as for FM/AM stations (page 50 "Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)" and "Listening to Preset Stations"). In addition, with HD Radio, multicasts can also be preset.
• The time for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "GUI" - "Tuner" (page 37).

△▽◀▷ ENTER

[NET/DTU] (DEVICE2 mode) [SEARCH] △▽◀▶ [iPod] [I◀◀],[▶▶▶1], [◀◀],[▶▶-], [▶▶],[■] [POWER OFF] ENTER △▽◀▶ [SEARCH] [CHANNEL +/-] [iPod] (IAMP model)

(Main remote control unit) [■] [▶/■] [◀] [▶▶] [REPEAT] DEMON [RAMDOM] (Sub remote control unit)

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit tton name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control

Selecting Audio Programs

HD Radio includes up to 9 audio programs (HD1 to HD8 and Analog). The different audio programs also have data programs.

Press [SEARCH] or to select the audio program.

If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs, "HD1" is indicated on the display. If it only has one audio program, "HD" is indicated.

If an audio program from HD2 to HD8 has been interrupted or if a program is called out using the preset buttons after it has been interrupted, HD1 is automatically selected after about 20 seconds.

Check the HD Radio Reception Information

Press while an HD Radio broadcast is being received.

The current reception information is shown on the display.

① Normal

② Frequency / Signal strength
③ Long station name / Program and Program type
④ Title name / Artist name
⑤ Album name / Genre name

NOTE

If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while "HD" and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed). Because of this, the "HD" indicator and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and unstable.

Default settings

Tuner presets
A1 ~ A8 B7	5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 / 100.1 MHz
B1 ~ B8	101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 MHz
C1 ~ C8 63	0 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 / 1710 kHz
D1 ~ D8	90.1 MHz
E1 ~ E8 90	1 MHz
F1 ~ F8	90.1 MHz
G1 ~ G8	90.1 MHz

iPod® Playback

The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately). The operation can also be performed using the buttons on the main unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI menus.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

※ The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply with applicable copyright legislation.

Basic Operation

1 Make the necessary preparations.

① Set the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod.
(See the Control Dock for iPod's operating instructions.)
② Assign the Control Dock for iPod's input.

"Source Select" - "(input source)" - "Assign"- "iPod dock" (1 page 42)

2 Either turn or press [iPod] (AMP mode) to select the input source assigned in step 1-② above.

(Pod screen)

※If the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be properly connected. Try connecting again.

"Source Select" - "(input source)" - "Play" ( page 40)

3 To operate using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the iPod mode. ( page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations")

4 Press [SEARCH] and hold it down for a 2 seconds or more to select the display mode.

To switch between modes, press and hold down the button. When remote mode is active, "Remote" is displayed.

[Display mode]		Browse mode	Remote mode
Display location		Main unit display	iPod display
playable files	Audio file	○	○
	Video file	×	○*
Active buttons	Remote control unit (AVR-4308CI)	○	○
	iPod	×	○

* : Video may not be output, depending on the combination of ASD-1R and iPod.

-

• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is "Mode3".
• Press or [POWER OFF] and set the AVR-4308CI's power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also switch the input source to one to which the GUI menu "iPod dock" is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod.

NOTE

• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not operate.
• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data.

Listening to Music

1 Use △▽ to select the menu, then press ENTER or ▷ to select the music file to be played.

2 Press ENTER or ▷. Playback starts.

Stopping playback temporarily

During playback, press ENTER or [▶].

Press again to resume playback.

Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing

During playback, either press and hold (to fast-reverse) or (to fast-forward), or press [◀◀] or [▶▶].

To cue to the beginning of a track

During playback, either press (to cue to the previous track) or (to cue to the next track), or press [1◄◄] or [►►].

To stop

During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [■].

Playing repeatedly

Press [CHANNEL -] or [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] All One OFF

GUI : "Source Select" - "(input source)" - "Playback Mode (iPod)" - "Repeat" (page 41)

Shuffling playback

Press [CHANNEL+] or [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] Albums Songs OFF

GUI : "Source Select" - "(input source)" - "Playback Mode (iPod)" - "Shuffle" (页 41)

Searching up or down pages

Press [SEARCH], then press ◁ (down) or ▷ (up).

To cancel, press or [SEARCH].

To switch between the Browse and Remote modes

Either press and hold [SEARCH].

-

• The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by pressing during playback.
• On the AVR-4308CI, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with ". (period)".
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "GUI" - "iPod" (1 page 37).

Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod

Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor. (Only for iPod equipped with slideshow or video functions.)

1 Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode. "Remote iPod" is displayed on the AVR-4308CI's display.
2 Watching the iPod's screen, use to select "Photos" or "Vidcos".
3 Press ENTER until the image you want to view is displayed.

-

• "TV Out" at the iPod's "Slideshow Settings" or "Video Settings" must be set to "On" in order to display the iPod's photo data or videos on the monitor. For details, see the iPod's operating instructions.
• When unable to operate by the remote control unit, use the iPod unit.

Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices

This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer or USB memory device.

☐ About the Internet radio function

- Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be tuned in.

The AVR-4308CI is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:

- Stations can be selected by genre and region.

- Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.

- Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio) format can be listened to.

- Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer.

※ The function is managed for individual users, so you must provide your MAC or e-mail address.

Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com

※ The radio station database service may be suspended without notice.

- The AVR-4308CI's Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a list edited and created for the AVR-4308CI.

Music server

This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a computer (music server) connected to the AVR-4308CI via a network.

With the AVR-4308CI's network audio playback function, connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below.

Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service Windows Media DRM10

When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.

For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.

Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a music server can be played as slide shows.

The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.

When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVR-4308CI, they are played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store in them in the direction in which you want them to play.

Installing Windows Media Player ver. 11

① If Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed, either download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a Windows update installer.
② Download the latest version of Windows Media Player ver. 11, either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update installer.
※ When using Windows Vista, there is no need to download a new version of Windows Media Player.

□ USB memory devices

A USB memory device can be connected to the AVR-4308CI's USB port to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB memory device.
Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR-430BCI.

- The AVR-4308CI is compatible with USB memory devices in "FAT16" or "FAT32" format.

[Album art function]

When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.

Still picture IJPEGI files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows.

The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.

When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVR-4308CI, they are played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store in them in the direction in which you want them to play.

[Compatible formats]

	Internet radio	Music server*	USB*
WMA (Windows Media Audio)	○ ○ ○	○	*
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)	○ ○ ○
WAV –		○	○
MPEG-4 AAC	–	○*	○*
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)	–	○	○
JPEG	–	○	○

A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
*: Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the AVR-4308CI.
Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer's settings.

※ Music server and USB

• The AVR-4308CI is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standards.
• The AVR-430BCI is compatible with WMA META tags.

[Playable formats]

	Sampling frequency	Bit rate	Extension
WMA (Windows Media Audio)	32/44.1/48 kHz	48~192 kbps	.wma
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)	32/44.1/48 kHz	32~320 kbps	.mp3
WAV	32/44.1/48 kHz	-	.wav
MPEG-4 AAC	32/44.1/48 kHz	16~320 kbps	.aac/.m4a/.mp4
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)	32/44.1/48 kHz	-	.flac

WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.

△▽◀◀ ENTER

[NEE/DTU] (DEVICE1 mode) △▽◀◀ [SEARCH] ENTER [NET/USB] (AMP mode)

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit
[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Basic Operation

1 Make the necessary preparations.

① Check the network environment, then turn on the AVR-4308CI's power. ( page 20 "Network Audio")
② If settings are required, make the network settings. ( page 32 - 35 "Network Setup")
③ Prepare the computer. (Computer's operating instructions) Install "Windows Media Player ver. 11".

2 Either turn or press [NET/USB] (AMP mode) to select "NET/USB".

GUI : "Source Select" - "NET/USB" - "Play" ( page 40 )

3 To operate using the main remote control unit, set the remote control unit to the NET/DTU (DEVICE 1) mode.

page 64 "Remote Control Unit Operations"

4 Use △▽ to select the menu, then press ENTER or ▷ to select the file you want to play.

5 Press ENTER or ▷. Playback starts.

Stopping playback temporarily During playback, press ENTER.

Press again to resume playback.

To stop

During the play or pause mode, press and hold ENTER

Searching up or down pages

Press [SEARCH], then press ◀ (down) or ▷(up). To cancel, press △▽ or [SEARCH].

Searching by first letter (Character search)

This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens for Internet radio stations or files stored on the computer.

① When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice.

② Use ◀ ▷ to select the first letter you want to search for. If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are displayed in alphabetical order.
If it is not possible to search the list, "unsorted list." is displayed.

• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound. The default setting is "Mode3".
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "GUI" - "NET/USB" (C) page 37
  • The display can be switched between the artist name, track name, album name.
• The track display order differs with the server specification. When, due to the server specification, track display is not in alphabetical order, character search may not operate correctly.

Δ▽◀▷ ENTER

[NET/DTU] (DEVICE1 mode) [A ~ G] [▲▼] [MEMO] Δ▽◀◀ ENTER [1 ~ 8] [NET/USB] (AMP mode)

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit

[ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit

Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Listening to Internet Radio

1 Use to select “Internet Radio”, then press ENTER or .
2 Use △▽ to select the item you want to play, then press ENTER or ▷. The station list is displayed.
3 Use △▽ to select the station, then press ENTER or ▷. Playback starts once buffering reaches "100%".

- There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely.

Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound to be interrupted.

• "Server Full" or "Connection Down" is displayed if the station busy or not broadcasting.
• On the AVR-4308CI, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with ", (period)".

Recently Played Internet Radio Stations

Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from "Recently Played" in top menu.

1 Use △▽ to select "Recently Played", then press ENTER or ▷.
2 Use △▽ to select the item you want to play, then press ENTER or ▷.

NOTE

Up to 20 stations stored in "Recently Played".

Presetting Internet Radio Stations

Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.

1 While the Internet radio station you want to preset is playing, press [MEMO].
2 Use to select “Preset”, then press ENTER.
3 Press [A \~ G], then press [1 \~ 8] to select the desired preset number.

The Internet radio station is now preset.

NOTE

If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously registered setting is cleared.

Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations

With the input source set to "NET/USB", press [A \~ G], then press [1 \~ 8].

The AVR 4308CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins.

Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites

Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.

1 Press [MEMO] while the Internet radio station you want to register is playing.
2 Use to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
3 Press ◀ to select "Yes". The Internet radio station is registered. If you do not want to register it, press ▷.

Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Your Favorites

1 Use to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or .
2 Use △▽ to select the Internet radio station, then press ENTER or ▷. The AVR-4308CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins.

Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites

1 Use to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or .
2 Use to select the Internet radio station you want to clear, then press [MEMO].
3 Press ◀ to select "Delete". The selected Internet radio station is cleared. To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press ▷.
3 Press ◀ to select "Delete". The selected Internet radio station is cleared. To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press ▷.

Playing Files Stored on a Computer

Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.

1 Use to select the host name of the computer on which the music file you want to play is located, then press ENTER or ▷.

2 Use △▽ to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or ▷.
3 Use △▽ to select the file, then press ENTER or ▷. Playback starts once buffering reaches "100%".

Selecting tracks

During playback, either press (previous track) or (next track).

• When playing still picture (JPEG) files, files can also be selected using the operation described below.
  During playback, either press [▲] (previous file) or [▼] (next file).
• Connections to the required system and specific settings must be made in order to play music files (page 20).
• Before starting, you must launch the computer's server software and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating instructions of your server software.
• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed.

Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in Your Favorites

Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations.

NOTE

• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
• When the operation described below is performed, the music server's database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files.
• When you quit the music server and then restart it.
• When music files are deleted or added on the music server.
• When using an ESCIENT server, place "ESCIENT" before the server name.

Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices

Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR-4308CI.

Basic Operation

1 Make the necessary preparations. • Set the USB port to be used.

GUI: "Source Select" - "NET/USB" - "Playback Mode" - "USB Select" (page 42)

- Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port.

2 Use to select “USB”, then press ENTER or .
3 Use △▽ to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or ▷.
4 Use △▽ to select the file, then press ENTER or ▷. Playback starts once buffering reaches "100%".

- By default, the front panel's USB port will be used. - Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed.

Diagram of a CD-ROM front panel with control buttons and a triangular indicator pointing to the right button.

[NET/DTU] (DEVICE1 mode) [▲▼] △▼ (Main remote control unit)

[REPEAT] [RANDOM] [USB] (Sub remote control unit)

About the button names in these explanations

< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only:

Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Playing repeatedly

Press [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] All One OFF

GUI: "Source Select" - "NET/USB" - "Playback Mode" - "Repeat" ( page 42)

Playing in random order

Press [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

GUI: "Source Select" - "NET/USB" - "Playback Mode" - "Random" (page 42)

Selecting tracks

During playback, either press (previous track) or (next track).

• When playing still picture (JPEG) files, tracks can also be selected using the operation described below.
  During playback, either press [▲] (previous file) or [▼] (next file).
• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the top partition can be selected.
• The AVR-4308CI is compatible with MP3 files conforming to "MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3" standards.
• If [USB] on the sub remote control unit is pressed when the US memory device or folder is selected, all the tracks on the USB memory device or in the folder are played.

NOTE

• The AVR-4308CI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the "Source Select" - "NET/USB" - "Playback Mode" - "USB Select" menu.
• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB memory device connected to the AVR-4308CI.
  • USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a USB connection type portable hard disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an AC adapter, we recommend using the AC adapter.
• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVR-4308CI's USB port using a USB cable.
  • The AVR-4308CI is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.

Operating the AVR-4308CI Using a Browser (Web control)

This function lets you operate the AVR-4308CI using Internet Explorer.

1 Switch "OFF" the "Power Saving" setting under "Manual Setup" - "Network Setup" - "Other" on the GUI menu (page 35).

2 Check the AVR-4308CI's IP address with "Manual Setup" - "Network Setup" - "Network Information" on the GUI menu (page 35).

NETWORK INFO Wired DECP On IP Address 197.108.13, *MAC Address 0006e4105057 Checking the IP address. Return

3 Enter the AVR-4308CI IP address in Internet Explorer's address box.

For example, if the IP address of AVR-430BCI is "192.168.011.003", enter "http://192.168.11.3".

PDEX - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Search Favorites Media Add new http://2021/16.11/modes.org/ DENON Web Controller Entering the IP address. Control Multi-7ex2 Control

4 When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu you want to operate.

graph TD
    A["Click when you operate the setup menu. (Example 2)"] --> B["Multi Zone Control"]
    A --> C["Multi Zone2 Control"]
    A --> D["Multi Zone3 Control"]
    A --> E["Multi Zone4 Control"]
    F["Click when you operate each zone. (Example 1)"] --> G["Set to Start"]
    F --> H["Zone Resume"]
    F --> I["End to Stop"]
    J["Click when you operate a small screen such as a PDA screen, etc. (Example 4)"] --> K["End to Stop"]
    L["Click to change zone name. (Example 3)"] --> M["End to Stop"]

5 Operate.

DENON MAIN ZONE Click when you update to the latest information. (*1) Click to perform each operation. Changes to each operation screen. Example 5) Click to return to the top menu. (*2)

Click to add a setting to the "Favorites" in your browser. (*3)

*1: Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time you operate. When operated from the main unit, click because the screen is not updated.

*2: Displayed when setting "Top Menu Link Setup" to "ON" in [Example 3].

*3: To avoid mistakenly performing menu operations of a zone you are not operating, we recommend that you register the setting contents for each zone under Favorites in your browser.

Click to determine a setting. [Example 2] Setup menu screen Click "v" and select from the displayed items. After entering characters, click "Set" to set, or click "Def" to return to initial setting. Enter figures or click "<" or "> " to make the setting, and then click "Set". Click the menu from which you want to make settings. The display on the right becomes each setting screen. Click "SAVE" when you want to save settings, and click "LOAD" when you want to call settings. Becomes each operation screen.

graph TD
    A["Click "ON" when performing Top Menu Link Setup. When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen (Default setting: "OFF")"] --> B["Multi Zone 1"]
    A --> C["Multi Zone 2"]
    A --> D["Multi Zone 3"]
    A --> E["Multi Zone 4"]
    A --> F["Enter zone name."]
    A --> G["Click to set zone name."]
    A --> H["Top Menu Link Setup"]
    H --> I["Color Choice"]
    H --> J["Back Top Menu."]
    H --> K["Click to return to the top menu."]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

[Example 4] PDA menu screen SON Web Controller Select to operate each zone. Main Zone Control Multi Zone2 Control Multi Zone3 Control Multi Zone4 Control NOTE You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the PDA menu screen. [Example 5] Net Audio operating screen No Action PAGE DOWN PAGE UP Click to move up/down the menu pages. Click the menu from which you want to make settings. Click when selecting menu. Click to stop play. Click to repeat play. Click to random play. REPEAT1 REPEAT OFF ON OFF When registering presets, click "v" to select the channel you want to register, and then click "MEMORY". Click "v" to select the preset channel you want to play. When searching using an acronym, click "v" and select from the displayed characters.

NOTE

• To perform web control, you must connect a web control device such as a PC to the same network as the AVR-430BCI.

- With web control, some network settings, etc., cannot be set.

- When updating firmware, settings made by the web controller may be reset.

QUICK SELECT CH SELECT

QUICK SELECT INPUT MODE △▽◀▶ CH SELECT [SOURCE SELECT]

About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Other Operations and Functions

Other Operations

Playing Super Audio CD

1 Assign "DENON LINK" or "HDMI" at the "Digital" or "HDMI" setting ( page 42).
2 Either turn or press [SOURCE SELECT] to select the input source assigned in step 1. The "DUNK" incl HDMI lights on the display.
3 Use INPUT MODE to select the input mode (page 41). Select the input mode according to the program source to played.
4 Select the surround mode ( page 43, 44). We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode.

5 Start playing the Super Audio CD. The "psd indicator lights on the display. For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment's operating instructions.

- When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode, the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are first converted into PCM format, then into analog signals. - "DSD DIRECT" is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. "DSD MULTI DIRECT" is shown on the display when playing DSD multi-channel signals in the DIRECT mode.

Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)

You can listen to one program source while recording a different program source.

1 Press . "ZONE2 SOURCE" is shown on the display. ZONE2 SOURCE ↔ ZONE2 TUNER ↔ ... ↔ ZONE2 HD Radio ↑ RECOUT HD Radio ↔ RECOUT XM ↔ ... ↔ RECOUT SOURCE

2 Turn until "RECOUT SOURCE" is displayed.
The "REC" indicator lights.

3 Turn to choose the input source to be recorded.

4 Play the program source. For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment's operating instructions. To record FM or AM broadcasts, select the broadcast (25 page 50).

5 Start recording. For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment's operating instructions.

• To cancel, press , then turn until "ZONE2 SOURCE" is displayed.
  • Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.
• Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals.
• Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors are not output to the REC OUT connectors, so connect using OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors.
• Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2 as well.
• In the REC OUT mode, the remote control unit's ZONE2 mode buttons cannot be operated.
• When the "Digital Out" setting is set to "ZONE4 Select", the OPTICAL3 output connector becomes the ZONE4 output. When using for recording, set to "Rec Select".
• The "XM" and "HD Radio" digital audio output signals are not output from the OPTICAL2 or OPTICAL3 output connectors. Also, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) are not output if they are copyright-protected.

NOTE

• Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright holder.
• When "DENON LINK" is assigned at the GUI menu "Assign" setting the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server and USB), XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the analog REC OUT connectors.
• Input sources for which "Delete" is selected at "Source Delete" cannot be selected.

Convenient Functions

Channel Level

You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste, as described below.

Press CH SELECT.

Use or CH SELECT to select the speaker.

The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the buttons is pressed.

Use ◀ ▷ to adjust the volume.

OFF" can be set by pressing ◀ when the subwoofer's volume is set to -12 dB.

ader Function

This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the front or rear speakers at once.

Press CH SELECT.

Press or CH SELECT to select "Fader".

Use ◀▷ to adjust the volume of the speakers. (◀: front, ▷: rear)

• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value is -12 dB.

Quick Select Function

With this function, the currently playing input source, input mode, surround mode, room EQ settings and volume can be stored in the memory.

1 Set the input source, input mode, surround mode, room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you want to store.
2 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT. Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights.

[Quick Select Defaults]

	Input Source Volume
Quick Select 1 DVD	-40 dB
Quick Select 2 TV/CBL		-40 dB
Quick Select 3	VCR	-40 dB

• To call out the settings, press QUICK SELECT at which the desired settings were stored.
• The Quick Select name can be changed (page 37).

NOTE

Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected if they have been deleted at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "Source Delete" (12 page 37). In this case, store them again.

Personal Memory Plus Function

This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, etc.) last selected for the individual input sources. When you switch to an input source, the settings are automatically set to the ones that were set the last time that input source was used.

The surround parameters, tone control, room EO settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes.

Last Function Memory

This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set. When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode was set.

Backup Memory

The various settings are backed up for about 1 week, even if the power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected.

Resetting the Microprocessor

Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed. When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.

Turn off the power using .

Press while simultaneously pressing and .

Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two buttons.

If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.

Remote Control Unit Operations

Main Remote Control Unit

• On the main remote control unit, the display switch, according to the device being operated and the mode.
• In modes other than iPod, the mode switches between "DEVICE1" and "DEVICE2" each time the [MODE SELECTOR] is pressed.
• In the AMP, TUNER, NET/DTU and iPod modes, when the remote ID is set, the AVR-4308CI can be used independently even in an environment containing multiple DENON amplifiers.

[—] AMP [MODE SELECTOR] [HOME] [NUMBER] [RC SETUP]

Operating DENON Audio Components

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be operated.

The indicator for the component to be operated flashes.
1951ZONE5/ZONE5/ZONE4
AMP : AMP / ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4 ☐ : IPSB
/ SYSTEM CALL TUNERIEM/AM/XM
10 : TUNER (FM/AM)/XM DVD : DVD player (Recorder);
NETWORK/USB1 CD p
NET NETWORK(SHA) DTU DIGITAL TUNED (HD Radial) VCR VCR
DIGITAL TUNER (HD Radio)
SAT/CBL : Satellite Receiver / Cable TV TV : TV

※ The mode switches each time [AMP] is pressed.

graph TD
    A["AMP mode"] --> B["ZONE2 mode"]
    B --> C["ZONE3 mode"]
    C --> D["SYSTEM CALL mode"]
    D --> E["ZONE4 mode"]

2 Operate the component.

※ For details, refer to the component's operating instructions.

[HOME] is used to return to the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALLI when in any mode other than AMP.

Presetting

The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate devices of various brands.

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to preset.
2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3 Press [NUMBER] and input the 5-digit number of the brand of the component to be preset. The numbers are shown in the Preset Code Table (End of the this manual).

When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the component to which that code belongs flashes.

※The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10 seconds.

Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does not operate, try inputting a different code.

Operating Preset Components

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be operated.
The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes.
2 Operate the component.
※ For details, refer to the component's operating instructions.

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment, some buttons may not operate.

NOTE

The device mode ("DEVICE1" or "DEVICE2") cannot be changed while the setting is being made.

Functions of Buttons by Component

EL Display [▶], [◀◀▶▶▶-1], [◀◀▶▶▶], [■,] [■], [SOURCE ON], [SOURCE OFF] [MENU] [SETUP/ SEARCH] [CH +/ SHUFFLE], [CH -/ REPEAT] [ENTER] [△▽◀▶] [RETURN] [0 ~ 9, +10] Buttons

EL Display
MODE SELECTOR DVD VCR iPod
Device Mode DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1
Device operated	DVD(Default setting)	DVD Recorder	CD(Default setting)	CD Recorder VCR TAPE iPod
▶	Playback	Playback	Playback	Playback	Playback	Playback	Playback/Pause
|◀◀ ▶▶|	Auto search(cue)	Auto search(cue)	Auto search(cue)	Auto search(cue)	Auto search(cue)	Auto search(cue)	Auto search(cue)
◀◀ ▶▶	Manual search(fast-reverse/fast-forward)	Manual search(fast-reverse/fast-forward)	Manual search(fast-reverse/fast-forward)	Manual search(fast-reverse/fast-forward)	Manual search(fast-reverse/fast-forward)	Manual search(fast-reverse/fast-forward)	Manual search(fast-reverse/fast-forward)
||	Pause	Pause	Pause	Pause	Pause	Pause	-
■	Stop	Stop	Stop	Stop	Stop	Stop	Stop
SOURCE ON	Power on	Power on	-	-	Power on	-	-
SOURCE OFF	Power off	Power off	-	-	Power off	-	-
Buttons
MENU	Menu/guide	Menu/guide	-	-	Menu/guide	-	Menu
△ ▽ ◀ ▷	Cursor	Cursor	-	-	Cursor	-	Cursor
ENTER	Enter setting	Enter setting	-	-	Enter setting	-	Enter
SETUP/SEARCH	Set up	Set up	-	-	Set up	-	Page forward screen / Browse/ Remote mode switching (Press and hold)
RETURN	Return	Return	-	-	Cancel	-	Return
CH + / SHUFFLE	-	-	-	-	Switch channels	-	1 track/album shuffle play
CH - / REPEAT	-	-	-	-	Switch channels	-	1 track/All track repeat play
0 ~ 9, +10	Select track	Select track	Select track	Select track	-	-	-
Special Remarks	1 2		1		1	1	-

[Special Remarks]

① Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.
② The names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand. Check beforehand.

NOTE

• Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the "DVD" - "DEVICE1" mode. Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the "DVD" - "DEVICE2" mode.
• Preset a VCR for the "VCR" - "DEVICE1" mode. Preset a tape deck for the "VCR" - "DEVICE2" mode.

EL Display [▶], [◀◀▶▶-1], [◀◀▶▶], [■], [■], [SOURCE ON], [SOURCE OFF] [MENU] [ENTER] [△▽◀▶] [DISPLAY] [SETUP] [CH +/-] [TV/VCR] [0 ~ 9, +10] Buttons

EL Display [A ~ G], [▲▼], [BAND], [MODE], [MEMO] [SEARCH] [CH +/-] [SHIFT] [ENTER] [△▽◀▶] [0 ~ 9] Buttons

EL Display
MODE SELECTOR TV Satellite Receiver / Cable TV
Device Mode DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2
Device operated TV (HITACHI) TV (SONY) SAT SAT
▶	Punch through Punch through Punch through Punch through
|◀◀ ▶▶|
◀◀ ▶▶
■
SOURCE ON	Power on	Power on	Power on	Power on
SOURCE OFF	Power off	Power off	Power off	Power off
Buttons
MENU	Menu/guide	Menu/guide	Menu/guide	Menu/guide
△ ∨ ◀ ▷	Cursor	Cursor	Cursor	Cursor
ENTER	Enter setting	Enter setting	Enter setting	Enter setting
SETUP	Set up	Set up	Set up	Set up
DISPLAY	Display	Display	Display	Display
CH + / -	Switch channels	Switch channels	Switch channels	Switch channels
0 - 9, +10	Channel selection	Channel selection	Channel selection	Channel selection
TV/VCR	Switch inputs	Switch inputs	-	-
Special Remarks	1, 3	1, 4	1, 5	1, 3

[Special Remarks]
① Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.
③ The CD, VCR or DVD buttons (one only set) can be assigned to the monitor, satellite receiver and cable TV (page 68 "Punch Through Function").

EL Display
MODE SELECTOR TU	NET / DTU
Device Mode DEVICE	1 DEVICE 2 DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2
Device operated	Analog tuner	XM	NET / USB	HD Radio
A ~ G	Preset memory block selection	Preset memory block selection	Preset memory block selection	Preset memory block selection
▲ ▼	Tuning + / -	Channel selection	-	Tuning + / -
BAND	AW/FM switching	-	-	AW/FM switching
MODE	Switch search modes	-	-	Switch search modes
MEMO	Preset memory registration	Preset memory registration	Preset memory registration	Preset memory registration
Buttons
△ ▼ ◀ ▷	-	Category search	Cursor	Multicast switching (△ ▼)
ENTER	-	-	Error, Playback/Pause	-
SEARCH	-	Direct search	Search	Multicast switching
CH + / -	Preset channel selection	Preset channel selection	Preset channel selection	Preset channel selection
0 ~ 9	Preset channel selection(1 ~ 8)	Preset channel selection(1 ~ 8)/Direct channel search(0 ~ 9)	Preset channel selection(1 ~ 8)	Preset channel selection(1 ~ 8)
SHIFT	Switch memory block	Switch memory block	Switch memory block	Switch memory block

Signal transmission indicator [—] AMP [—] TU [—] NET/DTU [—] SYSTEM CALL [—] iPod [—] MODE SELECTOR [—] POWER ON [—] NUMBER [—] RC SETUP [—] TV [—] [▶▶], [▶▶], [▶], [▶▶], [▶▶], [▶▶], [▶▶], [▶▶]

Setting the Remote ID

When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that only the desired AV receive operates.

1 Press [AMP] to set the main remote control unit to the AMP mode.
2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3 Refer to the table at the right, and use [NUMBER] to input the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote ID to be changed.
4 Press [TU], [iPod] or [NET/DTU] to select the mode to be set.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all modes.

MODE SELECTOR Remote ID	AMP (MAIN)	TUNER		iPod	NET/OTU
		DEVICE 1 (Analog TUNER)	DEVICE 2 (XM)		DEVICE 1 (Net Audio)	DEVICE 2 (HD Radio)
1 (Default)	81001	52863 52864	72815 62895 62840
2 82001	52795 52812	72816	62837 62841
3 83001	52800 52813	72817	62838 62842
4 84001	52805 52814	72818	62839 62843

NOTE

• When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-4308CI's (I-P page 38).
• When changing the AMP mode's remote ID, also change the "TUNER", "iPod" and "NET/DTU" remote ID at the same time.
• Set the remote ID of an analog tuner for "TUNER" - "DEVICE1", the XM remote ID for "DEVICE2".

Learning Function

If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they cannot be operated with the preset memory function, their remote control signals can be transferred to stored in the AVR-4308CI's main remote control unit.

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to set.
2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3 Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning mode is set.
4 Press the button to be set. The main remote control unit's display turns off.
※ If a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission indicator lights but the signal is not learned.

5 Point the main remote control units directly at each other and press and hold the button on the other device's remote control unit that you want to learn.

Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

Other rem AVR-4308CI's control unit (R)

※ If you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5.
※ The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].
※ The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if learning was not possible

6 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed.

• With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the device will not operate properly even when the signals have been learned. In this case, use the device's own remote control unit.
• Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (1 page 691).

NOTE

• [HOME] cannot be learned.
- Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP].
- The AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes cannot be learned.

System Call Function

This function lets you register a series of operations at a single button.

For example, the amplifier can be turned on, the input source selected, the monitor's power turned on, the source device's power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single button.

Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3).

Registering

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to register.

2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system call registration mode is set.

4 Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which you want to register the signals.

5 Press the buttons you want to register in the same sequence as the operations you want to perform.

The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed.

Example : Press [POWER ON].

↓ Press [MODE SELECTOR] - [DVD]. ↓ Press [▶].

※ The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].

※ Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to register.

6 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed.

Calling out

1 Press [AMP], to select "SYSTEM CALL".

2 Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which the signals were registered.

The registered signals are transmitted in the registered sequence.

Punch Through Function

CD, DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or SAT/CBL mode buttons.

For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the TV mode.

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).

2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.

3 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch through setting mode is set.

4 Press the button you want to punch through (▶, ■, ◀◀, ▶▶, |◀◀, ▶▶| or ||).

5 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to punch through (TV or SAT/CBL).

6 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed.

Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit

1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order.

The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight on time setting mode is set.

Set the light on time.

3 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

[Settable times]: [1]: 5 sec.

[2]: 10 sec. (Default)

[3]: 15 sec.

[4] : 20 sec

[4]: 25 sec [5]: 25 sec

Signal transmission indicator [SYSTEM CALL] [CHANNEL+/-] [NUMBER] [MODE SELECTOR] [RC SETUP]

Adjusting the Backlight's Brightness

The display's brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps. (Default: Step 3)

1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2 Press [CHANNEL+] or [CHANNEL-]. The display gets one step brighter when [+] is pressed. The display gets one step darker when [-] is pressed.
3 Press [RC SETUP] to complete the setting.

Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit

Learning Function

[Resetting button by button]

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to reset.
2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3 Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4 Press the button you want to reset twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

[Resetting by device mode]

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to reset.
2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3 Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to reset twice.

The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

System call function

1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2 Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3 Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) you want to reset.
4 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

Punch-through function

1 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to reset (TV or SAT/CBL).
2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
3 Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

All settings

1 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
2 Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order. The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times. All the settings are restored to their defaults.

Sub Remote Control Unit Operations

• The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control unit operations.
• The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi-zone, so you can use it to control the AVR-4308CI from other rooms.
• The operations listed below can be performed with the sub remote control unit.

• Switching the input source

• Adjusting the volume
• Tuner (AM/FM), XM, HD Radio and iPod operations
• NET/USB direct play
• GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations
• Zone power on/off
- It is not possible to operate devices other than the amplifier.

Multi-zone indicator [ZONE OFF] [ZONE SELECT] [ZONE ON] [SOURCE SELECT] [CHANNEL +/-] [MUTE] [MENU] [△▽◀▶] [SEARCH] [VOLUME +/-] [SHIFT] [I◀◀▶▶▶1], [TUNING ▲▼] [ALL MUSIC], [FAVORITES] [USB]

Functions of Buttons by Component

Device operated	DVD, HDP, TV / CBL, DVR1, VCR, V.AUX, SAT, CD, PHONO		TUNER(AM/FM)				DTU(HD Radio)
Zone selection M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4
ZONE SELECT	Zone operation mode selection		Zone operation mode selection				Zone operation mode selection
ZONE OFF	Power turned off (※1) Power turned off (※1) Power turned off (※1)
ZONE ON	Power turned on (※1) Power turned on (※1) Power turned on (※1)
SOURCE SELECT	Input source selection (※2)		Input source selection – Input source selection –
CHANNEL +/– – Preset channel selection – Preset channel selection –
SHIFT	-		Preset channel memoryblock selection			-	Preset channel memoryblock selection			-
VOLUME +/–	Adjustment of volume (※ 1)	-	Adjustment of volume (※ 1)			-	Adjustment of volume (※ 1)			-
MUTE	Muting (※1)	-	Muting (※1)			-	Muting (※1)			-
MENU	Selected zone menu	-	Selected zone menu			-	Selected zone menu			-
△ ▽ ◀ ▶	-		-				Multicast switching (△ ▽)			-
SEARCH	-		-				Multicast switching			-
I ◀ ◀ ▶ ▶ I,TUNING ▲ ▼	-		Tuning			-	Tuning			-
USB	※3	-	※3			-	※3			-
ALL MUSIC *(Music server only)	※4	-	※4			-	※4			-
FAVORITES *	※5	-	※5			-	※5			-

※1: Affects the currently selected zone.
*2: In ZONE4, it is not possible to select "XM", "HD Radio", or sources with no digital input signals ("TUNER", "PHONO", "iPod", etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
※3: The input source switches to "NET/USB" and the files on the USB memory device are played.
※4: The input source switches to "NET/USB" and the files in "All Music" on the music server are played.
※5: The input source switches to "NET/USB" and the files in "Favorites" are played.

Whether "All Music" or "Favorites" is selected depends on the "Direct Play" setting (1-7 page 42).

DIRECT PLAY button

• Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu "Source Select" – "NET/USB" – "Playback Mode" – "Direct Play".

FAVORITES: Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites.
ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the first track registered in the "All Music" folder.
- When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device.

NOTE

When the music server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites.

Multi-zone indicator [ZONE OFF] [ZONE SELECT] [ZONE ON] [ADVANCED SETUP] [SOURCE SELECT] [CHANNEL +/-] [MUTE] [MENU] [△▽ ◀▶] [SEARCH] [REPEAT] [RANDOM] [VOLUME +/-] [SHIFT] [ENTER] [RETURN] [I◀◀▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▶▲▼] [ALL MUSIC], [FAVORITES] [USB]

Device operated	SAT TU (XM)		NET / USB iPod
Zone selection M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4
ZONE SELECT	Zone operation mode selection		Zone operation mode selection				Zone operation mode selection
ZONE OFF	Power turned off (※1)		Power turned off (※1)				Power turned off (※1)
ZONE ON	Power turned on (※1)		Power turned on (※1)				Power turned on (※1)
SOURCE SELECT	Input source selection –		Input source selection (※2)				Input source selection			–
CHANNEL +/ –	Preset channel selection	–	Preset channel selection				–
SHIFT	Preset channel memory block selection	–	Preset channel memory block selection				–
VOLUME +/ –	Adjustment of volume (※ 1)	–	Adjustment of volume (※1)			–	Adjustment of volume (※1)			–
MUTE	Muting (※1)	–	Muting (※1)			–	Muting (※1)			–
MENU	Selected zone menu	–	Selected zone menu			–	Selected zone menu			–
△ ∇ ◀ ▷	Category search	–	File operations			–	File operations			–
ENTER	–		File operations			–	File operations			–
SEARCH	–		Page forward screen / Character search			–	Page forward screen / Browse/Remote mode switching (press and hold)			–
RETURN	–		File operations			–	–
I◀◀ ▶▶▶, TUNING ▲ ▼	Channel selection	–	Track search				Track search			–
■	–		Stop				Stop			–
▶/II	–		Play/pause				Play/pause			–
REPEAT	–		1-track/All-track repeat play (USB)				1-track/All-track repeat play			–
RANDOM	–		1-track random play (USB)				1-track/album shuffle play			–
USB	※3	–	※3				※3			–
ALL MUSIC * (Music server only)	※4	–	※4				※4			–
FAVORITES *	※5	–	※5				※5			–

*1: Affects the currently selected zone.
※2: In ZONE4, it is not possible to select "XM", "HD Radio", or sources with no digital input signals ("TUNER", "PHONO", "iPod", etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright protected.
※3: The input source switches to "NET/USB" and the files on the USB memory device are played.
※4: The input source switches to "NET/USB" and the files in "All Music" on the music server are played.
※5: The input source switches to "NET/USB" and the files in "Favorites" are played
: Whether "All Music" or "Favorites" is selected depends on the "Direct Play" setting ( page 42).

Switching Zones

Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub remote control unit.

1 Press [ZONE SELECT]. The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

2 While the multi-zone indicator is light, p SELECT] to select the zone to be operated. The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode)

We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the same room. When this is done, the unit can be set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are operated.

1 Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. All the multi-zone indicators light.

2 Select the multi-zone to be set. The selected multi-zone indicator lights.

① To set to "MAIN ZONE": Press [REPEAT]. ② To set to "ZONE2" : Press [RANDOM]. ③ To set to "ZONE3" : Press [USB]. ④ To set to "ZONE4" : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].

3 Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. The multi-zone indicator turns off.

To Cancel

1 Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.

2 Press [ZONE SELECT]. All the multi-zone indicators light.

3 Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. The multi-zone indicator turns off.

Setting the Remote ID

When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired one operates.

1 While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP] with the tip of a pen.

The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected remote ID flashes.

2 Select the remote ID to be set.

① To set to 1 : Press [REPEAT]. The "M" indicator flashes.
② To set to 2 : Press [RANDOM]. The "Z2" indicator flashes.
③ To set to 3 : Press [USB]. The "Z3" indicator flashes.
④ To set to 4 : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES]. The "Z4" indicator flashes.

3 While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP] with the tip of a pen.

The multi-zone indicator turns off

NOTE

When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-4308CI's (27 page 38).

Resetting the Settings

While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP] with the tip of a pen.

All the multi-zone indicators flash 4 times, then all the settings are restored to their defaults.

Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations

The AVR-4308CI is compatible with the following types of playback:

• Multi-zone playback (ZONE2 & ZONE3)
• Bi-amp playback (front speaker)
• Bi-wiring playback (front speaker)

NOTE

• For bi-amp and bi-wiring playback, use speakers compatible with that type of connection.
• When conducting bi-amp or bi-wiring playback, remove the short circuiting boards (or wires) from the speaker terminals.

Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function

The amp assign function lets you assign the amplifiers for the different channels built into the AVR-4308CI to the speaker outputs for the different zones.

Select the desired playback environment from among "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", then set the corresponding "Amp Assign" mode at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Option Setup" - "Amp Assign" (page 37).
Connect the speakers as described at "Speaker connections".

With "Setting 4" to "Setting 6", it is possible to switch the Amp Assign mode between the 71-channel mode and the multizone mode without changing the speaker connections.

Setting 1: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.

● 7.1-channel playback
● Switching between bi-amp and bi-wiring playback using speakers exclusively for 2-channel playback

Switching —— Surround Mode switching

graph LR
    A["Main zone"] -->|7.1ch SL-ASR-A| B["Main zone"]
    B -->|Direct / Stereo| C["Multi Channel / Surround"]
    C --> D["For 2-channel bi-amp playback"]
    C --> E["For 2-channel bi-wiring playback"]
    D --> F["Amp Assign mode: 2CH Bi-Amp"]
    E --> G["2CH Bi-Wiring"]

☐ Speaker connections

Speaker terminal	FRONT		CENTER	SURR-A		SURR. BACK		SURR-B/AMP ASSIGN		AMP ASSIGN-2
	R	L		R	L	R	L	R	L	R	L
Speaker to connect	FR	FL	C	SR-A	SL-A	SBR	SBL	R	L	R	L
								2ch L/R Bi-Amp connection or 2ch L/R Bi-Wiring connection

☐ Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals

Amp Assign mode\Speaker terminal

Status

FRONT

CENTER

SURR-A

SURR-BACK

SURR-B/AMP ASSIGN

AMP ASSIGN-2

Surround Mode

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

2CH Bi-Amp

DIRECT / STEREO

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

R

L

R

L

2ch L/R Bi-Amp connection

2CH Bi-Wiring

R

L

R

L

2ch L/R Bi-Wiring connection

2CH Bi-Amp

Multi Channel / Surround

FR

FL

C

SR-A

SL-A

SBR

SBL

-

-

-

-

2CH Bi-Wiring

Setting 2:

● Making bi-amp connections for the FL and FR channels in the main zone and conducting 5.1-channel playback

(switching with other modes not possible)

Setting 3:

● Making bi-wiring connections for the FL and FR channels in the main zone and conducting 7.1-channel playback

(switching with other modes not possible)

Main zone 5.1ch FL/FR Bi Amp SL A B SR → Bi-Amp Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL. Main zone 7.1ch FL/FR Bi Wiring SL A B SR → Bi-Wiring Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

☐ Speaker connections

Amp Assign mode

Speaker terminal

FRONT

CENTER

SURR-A

SURR. BACK

SURR-B / AMP ASSIGN

AMP ASSIGN-2

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

Bi-Amp

Speaker to connect

FR

FL

C

SR-A

SL-A

-

-

SR-B

SL-B

FR FL

FL/FR Bi-Amp connection

Bi-Wiring

FR

FL

C

SR-A

SL-A

SBR

SBL

SR-B

SL-B

FR FL

FL/FR Bi-Wiring connection

☐ Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals

Speaker terminalAmpAssign mode	FRONT		CENTER	SURR-A		SURR-BACK		SURR-B / AMPASSIGN		AMPASSIGN-2
	R	L		R	L	R	L	R	L	R	L
Bi-Amp	FR	FL	C	SR-A	SL-A	-	-	SR-B	SL-B	FR FLFL/FRBi-Ampconnection
Bi-Wiring	FR	FL	C	SR-A	SL-A	SBR	SBL	SR-B	SL-B	FR FLFL/FRBi-Wiringconnection

Setting 4: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.

● 7.1-channel playback

● Multi-zone playback

• 5.1 channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback with bi-wiring connections
• 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback with bi-wiring connections

Switching ...... ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button

graph LR
    A["Main zone FL/SWCR"] --> B["7.1ch FL/FR SL ASER/Wiring"]
    B --> C["5.1ch FL/FR SL/ASER/Wing"]
    C --> D["SL/SWCR"]
    D --> E["ZONE2 & 3 POWER ~ON""]
    D --> F["OFF"]
    G["Main zone SL/SWCR"] --> H["5.1ch FL/FR SL/ASER/Wing"]
    H --> I["ZONE2 ZIR Stereo"]
    H --> J["ZONE2 ZIR Stereo"]
    H --> K["ZONE2 ZIR Mono Mono"]
    L["Zone2 ZONE3"] --> M["Bi & ZONE2"]
    L --> N["Bi & ZONE3"]
    L --> O["Bi & ZONE/MONO1"]
    P["Amp Assign mode: Bi & ZONE2"] --> Q
    R["Amp Assign mode: Bi & ZONE3"] --> S
    T["Amp Assign mode: Bi & ZONE/MONO1"] --> U

Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

Speaker connections

Speaker terminal	FRONT		CENTER	SURR-A		SURR-BACK		SURR-B/AMP ASSIGN		AMP ASSIGN-2
	R	L		R	L	R	L	R	L	R	L
Speaker to connect	FR	FL	C	SR-A	SL-A	SBR	SBL	FR FL	Z2RFL/FRBi-Wiringconnection	Z3RZ3(MONO)	Z2LZ3LZ2(MONO)

☐ Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals

Speaker terminal Amp Assign mode

Status

FRONT

CENTER

SURR-A

SURR. BACK

SURR-B / AMP ASSIGN

AMP ASSIGN-2

ZONE2 & ZONE3

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

Bi & ZONE2

ON

FR

FL C

SR-A

SL-A

-

-

FR

FL

Z2R

Z2L

Bi & ZONE3

FL/FR Bi-Wiring connection

Z3R

Z3L

Bi & ZONE (MONO)

Z3 (MONO)

Z2 (MONO)

Bi & ZONE2

OFF

FR

FL C

SR-A

SL-A

SBR

SBL

FR

FL

-

-

Bi & ZONE3

FL/FR Bi-Wiring connection

Bi & ZONE (MONO)

Setting 5: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.

● 7.1-channel playback

● Multi-zone playback

• 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback
• 5.1 channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback
Switching ......ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button

graph LR
    A["Main zone"] -->|ZONE2 & 3 POWER\n"ON"/"OFF"| B["Main zone"]
    B --> C["ZONE2 ZONE3"]
    C --> D["Amp Assign mode: ZONE2"]
    C --> E["ZONE3"]
    C --> F["ZONE (MONO)"]

Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL.

☐ Speaker connections

Speaker terminal	FRONT		CENTER	SURR-A		SURR: BACK		SURR-B / AMP ASSIGN		AMP ASSIGN-2
	R	L		R	L	R	L	R	L	R	L
Speaker to connect	FR	FL	C	SR-A	SL-A	SBR	SBL	SR-B	SL-B	Z2R Z3R Z3 (MONO)	Z2L Z3L Z2 (MONO)

☐ Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals

Speaker terminal Amo Assign mode

Status

FRONT

CENTER

SURR-A

SURR. BACK

SURR-B / AMP ASSIGN

AMP ASSIGN-2

ZONE2 & ZONE3

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

ZONE2

ON

FR

FL C

SR-A

SL-A

-

-

SR-B

SL-B

Z2R

Z2L

ZONE3

73R

73L

ZONE (MONO)

73 (MONO)

72 (MONO)

ZONE2

OFF

FR

FL C

SR-A

SL-A

SBR

SBL

SR-B

SL-B

-

-

ZONE3

ZONE (MONO)

Setting 6: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes

●7.1-channel playback

●Multi-zone playback

• 3.1 channel playback + ZONE2 stereo playback + ZONE3 stereo playback

• 3.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback

Switching ......ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button

graph LR
    A["Main zone"] --> B["7.1ch"]
    B --> C["3.1ch"]
    C --> D["ZONE2"]
    C --> E["ZONE3"]
    D --> F["Output: ZONE2/3"]
    E --> G["Output: ZONE2/3 (MONO)"]
    H["AMP Assign mode: ZONE2/3"] --> I["Output: ZONE2/3 (MONO)"]
    J["ZONE2 & 3 POWER"] --> K["ON"]
    L["OFF"] --> M["ON"]
    N["FL 5W C TR"] --> O["+"]
    P["SL-A SRL SBR"] --> Q["+"]
    R["STEFO"] --> S["STEFO"]
    T["STEFO"] --> U["STEFO"]
    V["STEFO"] --> W["STEFO"]

• When the ZONE2 ON/OFF button is set to "ON" and the ZONE3 ON/OFF button is set to "OFF", the main zone is set to 5.1 channel playback.
• When the ZONE3 ON/OFF button is set to "ON", the main zone is set to 3.1-channel playback.

☐ Speaker connections

Speaker terminal	FRONT		CENTER	SURR-A		SURR. BACK		SURR-B / AMP ASSIGN		AMP ASSIGN-2
	R	L		R	L	R	L	R	L	R	L
Speaker to connect	FR	FL	C	SR-A	SL-A	SBR	SBL	Z3R	Z3L	Z2R	Z2L
								Z3 (MONO)		Z2 (MONO)

☐ Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals

Amp Assign mode\Speaker terminal

Status

FRONT

CENTER

SURR-A

SURR. BACK

SURR-B / AMP ASSIGN

AMP ASSIGN-2

ZONE2 & ZONE3

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

R

L

ZONE2/3

ON

FR

FL

C

-

-

-

-

Z3R

Z3L

Z2R

Z2L

ZONE2/3 (MONO)

Z3 (MONO)

Z2 (MONO)

ZONE2/3

OFF

FR

FL

C

SR-A

SL-A

SBR

SBL

-

-

-

-

ZONE2/3 (MONO)

Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out Output

Prepare power amplifiers for ZONE2 and ZONE3, an amplifier that is compatible with bit-stream input for ZONE4.

	Connectors for audio output	Audio signals Connectors	for video output
ZONE2 ZONE2 PRE OUT		Stereo	ZONE2 VIDEO OUT,ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
ZONE3 ZONE3 PRE OUT		Stereo	-
ZONE4	ZONE4 OPTICAL3 OUT	Bit-stream	-

graph TD
    subgraph_MAIN_ZONE["MAIN ZONE (7.1-channel system)"]
        A["FL SW SWHR"] --> B["DVD player"]
        B --> C["AVR 4308CI"]
        C --> D["Power amplifier"]
        D --> E["ZONE2 video output"]
        E --> F["ZONE2 audio output"]
        F --> G["Remote control unit"]
        G --> H["SB L"]
    end

    subgraph_ZONE_2["ZONE2"]
        I["Monitor"] --> J["Power amplifier"]
        J --> K["ZONE3"]
        K --> L["Power amplifier"]
        L --> M["ZONE3 audio output"]
    end

    subgraph_ZONE_4["ZONE4"]
        N["FL FR"] --> O["AV amplifier"]
        P["SB"] --> Q["Power amplifier"]
        Q --> R["ZONE4 digital output"]
    end

    style MAIN_ZONE fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style ZONE_2 fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style ZONE_4 fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

- When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONE3, set to "Mono". In this case, the ZONE2 (ZONE3) monaural output is output from the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-out L and R connectors, so connect as desired.

- Separate power amplifiers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

SOURCE SELECT VOLUME [= AMP] [Z2 ON] [OFF] [VOLUME] [MUTE] SOURCE SELECT [ON] [OFF] (ZONE3 or ZONE4 mode) (Main remote control unit) Multi-zone indicator [OFF] [ZONE SELECT] [ON] SOURCE SELECT VOLUME [MUTE] (Sub remote control unit)

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

Multi-Zone Operations

Turning the Power On and Off

[Operation on the main unit]

Press , or for the zone to be operated.

When the power turns on, the multi-zone indicator lights on the display.

[Operation on the remote control unit]

In the zone mode you want to operate, press [ON] or [OFF].

Selecting the Input Source

[Operation on the main unit]

① Press and select the zone to be adjusted. ② Turn .

[Operation on the remote control unit]

In the zone mode you want to operate, press [SOURCE SELECT].

Adjusting the Volume

[Operation on the main unit]

① Press and select the zone to be adjusted. ② Turn to adjust.

[Operation on the remote control unit]

In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME]

• The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Zone Setup" - "(select the zone)" - "Volume Level" is set to "Variable". The volume can be increased up to the value set at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Zone Setup" - "(select the zone)" - "Volume Limit" (page 36).
• The volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 can be adjusted with the remote control unit.

Turning off the Sound Temporarily

In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press [MUTE].

The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu "Manual Setup" - "Zone Setup" - "(select the zone)" - "Mute Level" (page 36).
To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again. The setting is canceled when the zone's power is turned off.

• The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording output connectors.
• For ZONE2, the "Zone Setup" can be made while watching the on-screen display. Also, when ZONE3 is operated, the on-screen display appears on the ZONE2 monitor, so operation can be performed watching this on-screen display.

ZONE2 MENU

INPUT : DVD
SIGNAL : ANALOG
VOL. :-40dB
> Bass	0 dBI
Treble	0 dBI
HPF	OFF I
Lch Lev.	0 dBI
Rch Lev.	0 dBI

ZONE2 MENU
>Channel	STEREO
Vol. Lev.	VAR
Vol. Limit	OFF
P. On Lev.	LAST
Mute Lev.	FULL

NOTE

• When connected to the component video output connectors, the on-screen display is not displayed.
• When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3, mayback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM 12-channel format.
• Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors cannot be played in multi-zone.
• In ZONE4, it is not possible to select "XM", "HD Radio", or sources with no digital input signals ("TUNER", "PHONO", "iPod", etc.). Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.
• When "DENON LINK" is assigned at the GUI menu "Assign" setting, the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server and USB), XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the digital input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.

Other Information

About Speaker Installation

Surround back speakers

Sound positioning directly to the rear can be achieved easily by adding a surround back speaker to a 5.1-channel system. In addition, the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position.

Change of positioning and acoustic image with 5.1-channel systems Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL Change of positioning and acoustic image with 6.1-channel systems SL ch SMH SS ch

Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL
In addition to sources recorded in 6.1-channels, the surround effect of conventional 2- to 5.1-channel sources can also be enhanced.

Number of surround back speakers

We recommend using 2 speakers.

When using dipolar speakers in particular, be sure to use 2 speakers.

Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers

We recommend installing the speakers for the surround "L" and "R" channels a bit forward.

Examples of speaker layouts

Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to use them.

[1] Using surround back speaker(s)

① When mainly playing movies

Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2-way speakers.

graph TD
    A["Front speakers Center speaker"] --> B["Monitor Subwoofer"]
    B --> C["Surround speakers"]
    C --> D["60°"]
    D --> E["60°"]
    E --> F["60°"]
    F --> G["60°"]
    G --> H["60°"]
    H --> I["60°"]
    I --> J["60°"]
    J --> K["60°"]
    K --> L["60°"]
    L --> M["60°"]
    M --> N["60°"]
    N --> O["60°"]
    O --> P["60°"]
    P --> Q["60°"]
    Q --> R["60°"]
    R --> S["60°"]
    S --> T["60°"]
    T --> U["60°"]
    U --> V["60°"]
    V --> W["60°"]
    W --> X["60°"]
    X --> Y["60°"]
    Y --> Z["60°"]

Surround back speakers
[As seen from above]

[As seen from the side]

② Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers

For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar types, provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position, mounted above ear level.

Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position

Surround speakers 60°

Surround back speakers
[As seen from above]

[As seen from the side]

③ When playing movies and music

Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwoofer 45° ~ 60° Surround Speaker A 120° Surround back Speaker Surround Speaker B

[As seen from above]

[As seen from the side]

[2] When not using surround back speakers

Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwooor 60° 120° Surround speakers

[As seen from above]

[As seen from the side]

Surround

The AVR-4308CI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories.

A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels ("FL", "FR" and "C"), 2 surround channels ("SL" and "SR") and the "LFE" channel for low frequencies.

Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a "three-dimensional" feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved.

A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master.

This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particular prioritizing sound quality.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories.

Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to achieve an excellent surround effect.

The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater to create a "three-dimensional" sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II matrix decoding technology.

Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1-channels.

There are 3 modes: "Music" suited for playing music, "Cinema" suited for playing movies, and "Game" which is optimized for playing games.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the "DOLBY DIGITAL SURROUND EX" audio format jointly developed by Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films.

The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back channels, provide improved sound positioning and expression of space.

※ Sources recorded in Dolby Surround

Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following logo marks.

Dolby Surround support mark : DO DOLEY SURROUND

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS Surround

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD. High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc's lossless audio format compatible with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ESTM Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back ISBI channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS NEO:6 ^TM Surround

DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1-channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes "DTS NEO:6 CINEMA" suited for playing movies and "DTS NEO:6 MUSIC" suited for playing music.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Neural Surround

Neural Surround™, a breakthrough in audio technology, will bring the excitement of surround music to more of America's listening audience. It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format 100 % compatible with stereo. With superior spectral resolution and channel separation, Neural Surround™ draws the brain's attention to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems. This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties in recorded performance as never before. As the chosen format for XM Satellite Radio's new XM HD surround programming, Neural Surround will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other broadcast format. XM Satellite Radio will be the first radio company to broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround™ music. This alone will amount to more than 25,000 hours of Neural Surround™ music each year.

neural SURROUND

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation.

D&M Holdings Inc. hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, nontransferable, limited license right exercisable to use the NA SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents Pending technology.

"Neural" and "Neural Audio" and "Neural Surround" are trademarks of Neural Audio Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT

Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT is the first technology to properly measure sour information throughout a listening area, then combine this information to accurately represent the acoustical problems in the room. Based on these measurements, MultEQ XT calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in every seat. Audyssey MultEQ XT not only corrects frequency response problem in a large listening area but also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

For a detailed description, see page 25.

AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT

Audyssey MultEQ ^® XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. It is licensed under U.S. and National Patent Applications 20030235318 and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign Patents pending. MultEQ XT and the Audyssey MultEQ XT logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital®)

HDCD ^® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution.

Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified automatically to select the optimum digital processing.

HDCD ^® , HDCD ^® , High Definition Compatible Digital ^® and Microsoft ^® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161, 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.

DENON LINK

DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality. It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals of DVD-Audio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition.

Advanced AL24 Processing Multi channel

Equipped with "Advanced AL24 Processing" time axis region information volume expansion

In addition to the existing "AL24 Processing Plus" bit expansion technology, DENON has also developed "Advanced AL24 Processing" that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region using high-speed signal detection and processing technology. In addition to expanding original 16-bit digital data to 24 bits, "Advanced AL24 Processing" uses data interpolation along the time axis or upconverted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the original data. A digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing-free pulse response, pulsive music data and attack sounds.

This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the delicate nuances in the music, the positions of the performers, and the breadth, height, and depth of the concert hall. "Advanced AL24 Processing" is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD DIRECT.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based on DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standards and optimized for use in consumer equipment.

Non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals are transmitted with a single connection.

HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI.

Deep Color

Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

Enables increased contrast ratio.

Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white.

At 30-bit pixel depth, a four times improvement would be the minimum, and the typical improvement would be eight times or more.

xvYCC

Next-generation "xvYCC" color space supports 1.8 times as many colors as existing HDTV signals.

Lets HDTV's display colors more accurately.

Enables displays with natural, vivid colors.

Lip Sync

Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of the content, synchronization of video and audio in user devices has become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex end-user adjustments. HDMI 1.3 incorporates an automatic video/audio synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically with total accuracy.

"HDMI", "HDMI logo" and "High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

Surround Modes and Parameters

○: Signal / Adjustable
× : No signal / Not adjustable
: Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
NOTE1: This parameter is available when the GUI menu "Parameter" - "Audio" - "Surround Parameters" - "Mode" is set to "Cinema" (page 44).
NOTE2: This parameter is available when the GUI menu "Parameter" - "Audio" - "Surround Parameters" - "Mode" is set to "Cinema" or "Pro Logic" IGB page 441.

NOTE:

*1.: When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
*2: When playing Dolby TrueHD signal.
*3: When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD.

Surround Mode

Signals and adjustability in the different modes

Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)

Mode Room Size Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer

PRO LOGIC III/X MUSIC mode only

NEO-B MUSIC mode only

EXT. IN only

Tone Night Mode Room TO RESTORER

Panorama Dimension Center Width Center

Image Subwoofer Art.

PURE DIRECT, DIRECT

×

×

×

×

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (OFF)

○ (NOTE5)

DSD DIRECT

×

×

×

×

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DSD MULTI DIRECT

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

MULTI CH DIRECT

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (OFF)

○ (NOTE5)

×

STEREO

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

EXT. IN

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

×

×

×

MULTI CH IN

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

×

WIDE SCREEN

×

×

○ (ON, 10)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx

○ (Cinema)

×

×

×

×

○ (OFF)

○ (3)

○ (3)

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II

○ (Cinema)

×

×

×

×

○ (OFF)

○ (3)

○ (3)

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

DTS NEO-6

○ (Cinema)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10.3)

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

DOLBY DIGITAL

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

×

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

×

○ (OFF)

×

DOLBY TrueHD

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

×

○ (OFF)

×

DTS SURROUND

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

×

DTS 96/24

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

×

DTS-HD

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

×

○ (OFF)

×

ncural

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

7CH STEREO

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

SUPER STADIUM

×

○ (Medium)

○ (10)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (NOTE3)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

ROCK ARENA

×

○ (Medium)

○ (10)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (NOTE4)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

JAZZ CLUB

×

○ (Medium)

○ (10)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

CLASSIC CONCERT

×

○ (Medium)

○ (10)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

MONO MOVIE

×

○ (Medium)

○ (10)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

VIDEO GAME

×

○ (Medium)

○ (10)

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

MATRIX

×

×

×

○ (30 msec)

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

VIRTUAL

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○ (10 dB)

○ (OFF)

○ (OFF)

○

○: Signal / Adjustable
× : No signal / Not adjustable
NOTE3: BASS -6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB
NOTE4: BASS-6 dB, TREBLE+4 dB
NOTES: Can be used according to the "Direct Mode" setting.

Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals

Button

Note

Input signals

Sum round Mode

ANALOG

LINEAR PCM / WAV

WMM (Windows Media Audio) / MP3 / MPEG-4 AAC / FLAC

DTS-HD DTS DOLEY DOLEY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD

DTS-ID Master Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS FS DSCRIT (With Flag)

DTS FS MTRX (With Flag)

DTS (5 1ch)

CTS 96/24

DOLEY TrueID

DOIRY DIGITAL Plus

DOIRY DIGITAL EX (With Flag)

DOIRY DIGITAL EX (With no Flag)

DOIRY DIGITAL EX (5 1/5/4ch)

DOIRY DIGITAL EX (4/5ch)

DOIRY DIGITAL EX (2ch)

DVD-Audio (multi ch)

DVD-Audio (2ch)

DSD (multi ch)

DSD (2ch)

STANDARD

DTS SURROUND

DTS-HD MSTR

×

×

×

●

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS-HD HI RES

×

×

×

×

●

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS ES DSCRIT6.1

*1

×

×

×

×

×

●

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS ES MTRX6.1

*1

×

×

×

×

×

×

●

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS SURROUND

×

×

×

×

×

○

○

●

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS 96/24

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

●

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS (-HD) + PLIIx CINEMA

*2

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS (-HD) + PLIIx MUSIC

*1

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS (-HD) + NEO.6

*1

×

×

×

○

○

×

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DTS NEO.6 CINEMA

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DTS NEO.6 MUSIC

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DOLBY SURROUND

DOLBY TrueHD

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

●

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DOLBY DIGITAL+

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

●

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

*1

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

DOLBY (D+I) (HD) +EX

*1

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DOLBY DIGITAL

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

●

●

●

×

×

×

×

DOLBY (D+I) (HD) +PLIIx CINEMA

*2

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

○

●

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

DOLBY (D+I) (HD) +PLIIx MUSIC

*1

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

○

○

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx CINEMA

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx MUSIC

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx GAME

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II CINEMA

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II MUSIC

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II GAME

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

DOLBY PRO LOGIC

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

×

neural

○

○

○

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

MULTI CH IN

MULTI CH IN

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

●

×

●

MULTI IN + PLIIx CINEMA

*2

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

MULTI IN + PLIIx MUSIC

*1

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

MULTI IN + Dolby EX

*1

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

○

×

○

MULTI CH IN 7.1

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

● (7.1) × ×

NOTE:
*1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to "None".
*2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to "1spkr" or "None".

● : Mode selectable in initial status

○ : Mode fixed when "AFDM" is "ON"

○: Selectable mode

×: Non-selectable mode

* : HDMI input only

NOTE
*1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to "None".
*2. This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to "1apk" or "None".
*3: If the surround back speaker setup is set to "None", then "5CH STEREO" is displayed.
● : Mode selectable in initial status
○: Selectable mode
×: Non selectable mode

About Networks

Windows Media Player Ver.11

This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation.

It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player Ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV.

vTuner

This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs.

For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below. vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

DLNA

- DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.

- Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.

Windows Media DRM

A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.

• Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.

- The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

- Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software's right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software's ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.

About Wireless LAN

Wi-Fi®

Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

IEEE 802.11b

This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States. It uses the 2.4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license (ISM band), enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps.

The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate.

IEEE 802.11g

This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States, and is compatible with IEEE 802.11b. It also uses the 2.4 GHz band, but enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.

The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate.

Infrastructure Communications

"Infrastructure Communications" refers to networks using wireless LAN access points.

This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN via a wireless LAN access point. Wireless LAN access points include wireless broadband routers.

Ad-hoc Communications

Signal transfer through wireless interconnection of computers is referred to as "ad hoc communications". With such ad hoc communications there is no connection to the Internet. Ad hoc communications are suited for establishing simple temporary networks.

Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier)

When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. This grouping is done by "SSID" or "Security Set Identifiers." For further security, a WEP key is set and signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match.

WEP Key (Network Key)

This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On the AVR-4308CI, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security.

WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)

This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption.

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)

This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client.

Passphrase

This refers to the code key used for WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication, a WPA authentication method.

TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)

This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4, the same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing the network key used for encryption for each packet.

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)

This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the "Rijndael" algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits as well, offering extremely high encryption security.

Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output
□ MAIN ZONE

○: Signal present
X: No signal
480p - 720p : 480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p
× : No output
*1: The "Picture Adjust" setting can be made.
*2 Superimposed over video signal
*3: Only displayed when the MENU button is
pressed
*4. If the input signal is in SECAM format, it is
converted to PAL for output

Output according to "Resolution" setting (vp Scaler: When "A to H" is set) (page 30).

Wallpaper or set background color displayed

Output according to "Resolution" setting (p Scaler: When "H to H" is set) (page 30).

GUI menu not displayed

• The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4,43, PAL -N, PAL -M and PAL -60
- When SECAM signals of video input are up converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector.
- If the input signal is a component 1080p signal, up-converting to HDMI is not possible.
• The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer's resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.

○: Signal present
×: No signal
○: Output present
×: No output
*2: Superimposed over video signal

To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor, output with a resolution of 480p/576p.

ZONE2

O: Signal present
×: No signal

: Output present

No output

: On-screen display not displayed

Relationship Between Amp Assign Setting and Speaker Output
STEREO or DIRECT (2ch) Mode

Setting	Status Speaker terminal
	Surround mode	SURROUND A	SURROUND BACK	SURROUND B/ASSIGN	ASSIGN-2
2ch Bi-Wiring	STEREO/DIRECT-Other SLASBA SBL/S3B -	-	FL/IR	FL/IR
			-
2ch Bi-Amp	STEREO/DIRECT-Other SLASBA SBL/S3B -	-	FL/IR	FL/IR
			-

Multi-Zone Power On/Off

Setting	Status Speaker terminal
	ZONE2	ZONE3 SURROUND A	SURROUND BACK	SURROUND B/ASSIGN	ASSIGN-2
ZONE2	ON	ON SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z2 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z2 L/R
	OFF	ON SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB -
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB -
ZONE3	ON	ON SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z3 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB -
	OFF	ON SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z3 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB -
ZONE (MONO)	ON	ON SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z2/Z3
		OFF SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z2/Z3
	OFF	ON SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z2/Z3
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB -
Bi-Wiring & ZONE2	ON	ON SLA/SRA -	FL/FR	Z2 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA -	FL/FR	Z2 L/R
	OFF	ON SLA/SRA SBL/SBR	FL/FR	-
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR	FL/FR	-
Bi-Wiring & ZONE3	ON	ON SLA/SRA -	FL/FR	Z3 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR	FL/FR	-
	OFF	ON SLA/SRA -	FL/FR	Z3 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR	FL/FR	-
Bi-Wiring & ZONE(MONO)	ON	ON SLA/SRA	FL/FR	Z2/Z3
		OFF SLA/SRA -	FL/FR	Z2/Z3
	OFF	ON SLA/SRA -	FL/FR	Z2/Z3
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR	FL/FR	-
ZONE2/ ZONE3	ON	ON -	-	Z3 L/R	Z2 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB Z2 L/R
	OFF	ON -	-	Z3 L/R	Z2 L/R
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB -
ZONE2/3 (MONO)	ON	ON -	-	Z3/MONCI	Z2/MONCI
		OFF SLA/SRA - SLB/SRB	Z2/MONCI
	OFF	ON -	-	Z3/MONCI	-
		OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB -

Troubleshooting

If a problem should arise, first check the following:

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner's manual?

3. Are the other components operating properly?

If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,

there may be a malfunction

In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.

[General]

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
Power does not turn on, or turns off directly after it was turned on.	• Connection of the power cord is faulty.	• Check that the power plugs are securely inserted into the AVR-4308CI's AC inlets and the wall power outlet.	22
No sound is produced from speakers.	• Connection with the input devices or connection of the speaker cables is faulty.• Device you want to play and set input source do not match.• Master volume is turned too low.• Mute mode is set.• Headphones are connected.• No digital signals are being input.• The connectors to which the digital inputs are assigned and the settable input modes do not match.	• Check the connections.• Select an appropriate input source.• Adjust the master volume to an appropriate level.• Cancel the mute mode.• Disconnect the headphones.• Select an input source for which the digital input setting has been made.• Set the input mode.	939, 404949494242
Display is off.	• The "Dimmer" setting is set to "OFF":• The PURE DIRECT mode is set.	• Set to something other than "OFF":• Set a surround mode other than the PURE DIRECT mode.	3843, 44
"DOLBY DIGITAL" indicator does not appear on display.	• DVD player's digital audio output setting is not proper.	• Check the DVD player's audio output setting. For details, read the DVD player's operating instructions.	-

Symptom	Cause Countermeasure Page
Power turns of suddenly and power indicator flashes red.	Protection circuit activated due to rise of internal temperature.Core wires of two speakers are touching each other or a core wire is sticking out of the terminal and touching the set's rear panel, activating the protection circuit.Speakers with an impedance other than specified are being used.Set is damaged.	Turn off the power, wait for the set to fully cool down, then turn the power back on.Place the set in a well-ventilated place.First unplug the power cord, then twist the core wires tightly or terminate the speaker cables, then reconnect.Use speakers with the specified impedance.Turn off the power and contact a DENON service center.

[Remote Control Unit]

Symptom	Cause Countermeasure Page
Set does not work properly when remote control unit operated.	Batteries are worn.You are operating outside of the specified range.Obstacle between main unit and remote control unit.The batteries are not inserted in the proper direction, as indicated by the polarity marks in the battery compartment.The set's remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.).The remote ID of the main unit and remote control unit do not match.	Replace with new batteries.Operate within the specified range.Remove the obstacle.Insert the batteries in the proper direction, following the polarity marks in the battery compartment.Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.Set the same remote IDs for the main unit and remote control unit.	33333338, 67

[Audio]

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
No sound is produced from center speaker.	You are playing a monaural source (TV, AM radio broadcast etc.) in the STANDARD (Dolby/DTS Surround) mode.	The mode is set to something other than “STANDARD” (Dolby/DTS Surround).	44
No sound is produced from surround speakers.	The surround mode is set to “STEREO”, “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.The surround speaker’s power amplifier is assigned to a different channel.	Set to a surround playback mode.Check the setting and change it as necessary.	43, 4437
No sound is produced from surround back speaker.	Surround back speaker setting is set to “None”.Surround mode not set to a mode for 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback.The surround back speaker’s power amplifier is assigned to a different channel.	Set to something other than “None”.Select a surround playback mode.Check the setting and change it as necessary.	2843, 4437
No sound is produced from subwoofer.	Subwoofer’s power not turned on.The “Subwoofer” setting at “Speaker configuration” is set to “No”.The subwoofer is not properly connected.The subwoofer’s volume is turned off.	Turn on the subwoofer’s power.Set to “Yes”.Check the connections.Adjust the subwoofer’s volume to an appropriate level.	–28962
No test tones are produced when main remote control unit’s TEST TONE button is pressed.	Surround mode not set to “STANDARD” (Dolby/DTS Surround).	Set to the “STANDARD” (Dolby/DTS Surround) mode.	43
DTS sound is not output.	DVD player’s audio output setting is not set to bitstream.DVD player is not compatible with DTS sound playback.The AVR 4308CI’s “Decode Mode” setting is set to “PCM”.	Set the DVD player. For details, refer to the DVD player’s operating instructions.Use a DTS-compatible player.Set to the “Auto” or “DTS” mode.	––41
HDMI audio signals are not output from speakers.	The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to “TV”.	Set to “Amp”.	30

Symptom Cause Countemearasure Page
No sound is output from the monitor connected with HDMI connections.	• The "Manual Setup" – "HDMI Setup" – "Audio" setting is set to "Amp".	• Set to "TV".	30

[Video]

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
The on-screen display does not appear.	• The format of the GUI and TV (NTSC or PALI) do not match.	• Match the format of the GUI and TV.	37
No picture appears.	• The connections between the AVR-4308CI and monitor are faulty.• The monitor's input setting is wrong.• PURE DIRECT mode is set.• The player is connected using the component input connectors, the monitor is connected using the video (yellow) or S-Video output connectors.	• Check the connections.• Set properly.• Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode.• High definition (1080/720p) and progressive (480p/576p) video signals are not down-converted. Set the player to interlace (480/576p) signals.	11 ~ 22–43, 44–
No picture appears with HDMI connections.	• The connections to the HDMI connectors are faulty.• HDMI input setting is improper.• The monitor is not compatible with copyright protection (HDCPI).• The HDMI format of the player and monitor do not match.• Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not be correct when you set to 'Auto IDual'.	• Check the connections.• Check the HDMI input setting.• Connect a monitor that is compatible with copyright protection (HDCPI).• Match the HDMI format of the player and monitor.• Set to either "Monitor 1" or "Monitor 2".	1142111130
Picture cannot be recorded.	• Input source does not match recorder's video connection connector (video or S-Video).	• The video conversion function does not work for the REC OUT connectors. Match the input source and recorder connections.	15
DVDs cannot be copied on a VCR.	–	• This is not a malfunction. Most movie software includes copy prevention signals and cannot be copied.	–

[iPod]

Symptom	Cause	Countermeasure	Page
iPod cannot be played.	The input source assigned to "iPod dock" is not selected.Cable is not properly connected.Control Dock for iPod's AC adapter is not connected to power outlet.	Switch to the input source assigned at "iPod dock".Reconnect.Plug the Control Dock for iPod's AC adapter into a power outlet.	4213-

【NET/USB】

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
When a USB memory device is connected, “USB” is not displayed on the GUI menu.	The set cannot recognize a USB memory device.A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards is connected.The set port and the connected port do not match.A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.USB memory device is connected via USB hub.	Check the connection.Connect a USB memory device conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.Connect to the port set at “USB Select”;This is not a malfunction. DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power.Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.	18--42--
Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.	USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions.Files are stored in a non-compatible format.You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected.	Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB memory device’s operating instructions.When divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition can be played.Record the files in a compatible format.Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.	-----5555
The file names are not displayed properly (“...”, etc.).	Characters that cannot be displayed are used.	This is not a malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a “.. (period)”.	-

Symptom	Cause	Countermeasure	Page
Internet radio cannot be played.	· Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is disconnected.· Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format.· The computer's or router's firewall is activated.· Radio station is not currently broadcasting.· IP address is wrong.	· Check the connection status.· Only Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set.· Check the computer's or router's firewall settings.· Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting.· Check the set's IP address.	2055-5735
Files stored on a computer cannot be played.	· Files are stored in a non-compatible format.· You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected.· Set and computer are connected by USB cable.	· Record in a compatible format.· Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.· The set's USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.	5555-
Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.	· The computer's or router's firewall is activated.· Computer's power is not turned on.· Server is not running.· Set's IP address is wrong.	· Check the computer's or router's firewall settings.· Turn on the power.· Launch the server.· Check the set's IP address.	--32 ~ 35
Cannot connect to preset or favorite radio stations.	· Radio station is not currently broadcasting.· Radio station is not currently in service.	· Wait a while before trying again.· It is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.	--
For some radio stations, "Server Full" or "Connection Down" is displayed and station cannot be connected to.	· Station is congested or not currently broadcasting.	· Wait a while before trying again.	-
Sound is broken during playback.	· Network's signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested.	· This is not a malfunction. When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be broken, depending on the communications conditions.	-
Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy.	· File being played has a low bit rate.	· This is not a malfunction.	-

【Wireless LAN】

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
Cannot connect to network.	The settings of the SSID and network key (WEP) are incorrect.The reception is poor and the signals cannot be received.There are multiple networks and the usable channels overlap.	Match the network settings with the AVR-4308CI's settings.Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN's access point, remove any obstacles and otherwise improve visibility, then try reconnecting. Also install away from microwave ovens and the access points of other networks.Set the access point's channel settings away from the channels used for other networks. Alternatively, connect using a network cable.	33 ~ 35--
Played sound is interrupted or sound cannot be played.	There are multiple networks and the usable channels overlap.	Set the access point's channel settings away from the channels used for other networks. Alternatively, connect using a network cable.	--

[XM Satellite Radio]

Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page
“CHECK XM TUNER” is displayed.	The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed or not fully seated in the XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner dock is not connected to the AVR-4308CI.	Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is connected to the AVR-4308CI.	18
“CHECK ANTENNA” is displayed.	AVR-4308CI’s XM connector and the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock is not properly connected.	Check that the connections are correct.	18
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed.	The signal cannot be received.	Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock antenna.	52
“OFF AIR” is displayed.	The selected channel is not currently broadcasting.	Select another channel.	-
Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1.	The XM Mini-Tuner is not activated.	Contact XM Radio.	-
“XM---” is displayed.	The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new radio or a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period.	Consult the latest channel guide atwww.xmradio.comorwww.xmradio.cafor the current list of channels. For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.	-
“UPDATING” is displayed.	You selected an XM channel that is blocked or cannot be received with your XM subscription package.	Consult the latest channel guide atwww.xmradio.comorwww.xmradio.cafor the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visitwww.xmradio.comorwww.xmradio.cacontact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346 or 1-877-438-9677.	-

Specifications

Audio section

• Power amplifier

Rated output:

Front:

140W + 140W (8 Ω/chms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

170 W + 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Center

140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz \~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Surround (A + B):

140W + 140W |8 Ω/chms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.I

170 W + 170 W (6 Q/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % TH.D.)

Surround back:

140W + 140W [8 O/chms, 20 Hz \~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.]

170 W + 170 W 16 O/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % TH.D.I

150 W x 2ch (8 Ω/ohms)

Dynamic power:

220 W × 2ch (4 Ω/ohms)

Output connectors:

Surround: A or B

A + B

• Analog

Input sensitivity / Input impedance:

200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms

Frequency response:

10 Hz \~ 100 kHz +1, -3 dB (DIRECT mode)

S/N:

102 dB (IHF-A weighted, DIRECT mode)

Distortion:

0.005 % (20 Hz \~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT model

Rated output:

1.2 V

- Digital

D/A output:

Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)

S/N ratio — 102 dB

Dynamic range — 100 dB

Digital input:

Format — Digital audio interface

- Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)

Input sensitivity:

RIAA deviation:

+1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

S/N:

74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)

Rate

150 mV

Distortion fac

0.03 % (1 kHz 3 V)

Video section

• Standard video connectors

Input / output level and impedance:

1 Vp-p. 75 Q/ohms

Frequency response:

5 Hz \~ 10 MHz — +0, -3 dB (when video convert set to "OFF")

• S-Video connectors

Input / output level and impedance:

Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/chms

C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

• Color component video connector

Input / output level and impedance:

Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms

1

B/C8 signal - 0.7 Vo-p, 75 O/ohms

:

K/Cx signal — 0.7 Vo-p, 75 Ω/ohms

Frequency response:

5 Hz \~ 100 MHz — +0, -3 dB (when video convert set to "OFF")

Tuner section [FM] [AM]

(note: V at 75 / ohms, 0dBf = 1× 10

Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz \~ 107.9 MHz 520 kHz \~ 1710 kHz

Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 μV (11.2 dBf) 18 μV

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 μV (15.3 dB)

STEREO 23 μV (38.5 dB)

S/N (IHF-A)

MONO 77 dB

STEREO 72 dB

Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.15%

STEREO 0.3%

HD Radio section

[FM] [AM]

(note: V at 75 / ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10

Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz 530 kHz - 1710 kHz

Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 μV (11.2 dB) 18 μV

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 μV (15.3 dBf)

STEREO 23 μV (38.5 dBf)

S/N (IHF-A)

MONO 77 dB

STEREO 72 dB

HD 85 dB

85 dB

Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.15%

STEREO 0.3 %

HD 0.01%

0.01 %

Wireless LAN

Network type (wireless LAN standards) : Conforming to IEEE 802.11b

Conforming to IEEE 802.11g

(Conforming to Wi-Fi

⑩*

Transfer rate: DS-SS: 11 / 5.5 / 2 / 1 Mbps (Automatic switching)

OFDM: 54/48/36/24/18/12/9/6 Mbps (Automatic switching)

Security:

WEP key (network key) (64/128 bits)

WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)

WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)

Used frequency range: 2,412 MHz - 2,462 MHz

No. of channels: Conforming to IEEE 802.11b : 11ch (DS-SS) IOf which 1 channel used)

Conforming to IEEE 802.11g : 11ch (OFDM) (Of which 1 channel used)

General

Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power consumption:

0.3 W (Standby)

Maximum external dimensions: 434 (W) x 195 (H) x 455 (D) mm (17-3/32" x 7-43/64" x 17-29/32")

Weight:

□ Main remote control unit (RC-1068)

Batteries: LRC/AA Type (two batteries)

Maximum external dimensions: 63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm (2-31/64" x 9-3/8" x 1-7/32")

Weight: 190 g (Approx 6.7 oz) (including batteries)

☐ Sub remote control unit (RC-1070)

Batteries: R03/AAA Type (two batteries)

Maximum external dimensions: 49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm (1-59/64" x 8-21/32" x 31/32")

Weight: 114 g (Approx 4 oz) (including batteries)

*: Wi-Fi® conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the "Wi-Fi Alliance" a group certifying interoperability.

among wireless LAN devices.

※ For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

List of preset codes

Denon Amp

D Dench 81001, 92001, 83001, 84001

Denon Tuner

D Denon (Analog) 52853, 52735, 52800, 5280a Denon (XM Radio) 52864, 52812, 52813, 52814

Denon Digital Tuner

D Denon (NEI) 62865, 62837, 62838, 62939 Denon (HD Radiol) 62840, 62941, 62942, 62843

Denon iPod

D Denon 72815, 7281E, 72817, 72818

Cable

A-Mark 0008, 00164
ABC 00237, 00003, 0009
Acaphase 0003
Acorn 00237
Action 00237
Active 00257
AOS 01230
Arch. Densati 01s12
American 00899
Amsterdam	01222
Anchor	00237
Aura 01230
Auster	00276
BCC	00276
Ball South	00899
Bast ink	00303
Birmingham Cable Communications	00276
British Telecom	00003
Cable & Wireless	01068
Century 00008
Coship	01462
Daiklan 00778
Dauryung	01877, 00977, 00477, 00098
Duguo	01167
Director	00476
DX Antenna	01500
Emerson	00303
Encon	00008
Fogate	00276
Foxtel	01222
Franco Telecom	00817

Froobox	01482
Fujitsu	01497
Galaxi 00008
GE	00237, 00144
Genius	00478
General Instrument	00478, 00810, 00276, 00003
Gibraltar 00003
GNI	01468
GoldStar 00144
Itochu 00003, 00009
Hongfeng Jiangsu	01462
Jowalin 00303
Insight	00478, 00810
Jerrid 00776, 00810, 00278, 00003
Juchou 01445
KNC 00008
LG	00144
Macah	00517
Madrital	01233
Masoro C1510
Matay	01082
Mamorex	00003
Milshubisla	00000
Motorola	01375, 00476, 00810, 00276, 01187
MS	00300
MTC 01496
Noos	00817
Nova Vision	00009
Novapiux	00009
NIL	00279, 00003, 01080, 01058
Oxt	00300
Ono	01068
Optus 00275, 01060
Pace	01677, 00877, 00237, 00008, 01063, 01068, 01577
Panasonic 00000, 00008, 00144, 01488
Paragon	00000, 00008, 00525
Penney	00000
Philips	01300, 00377, 00817
Pioneer	01677, 00877, 00144, 00533, 01400
Pulsar	00000
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix	00000
Quasar 00000
RadioShack	00300
Rugal	00279
Runco	00000
Sagem	00517
Salona	00000
Samsung	00000, 00000, 00144, 00776, 00640, 01060, 01866

Scientific Atlanta	01877, 03577, 00477, 00237, 03000, 03000, 00088, 01510
Skyworth	01464
Sony	01006, 01490
Sprucey DC44
Starcom	00033
StarHub	00276
Sumitomo 01500, 01504
Supercable	00276
Taiwan	00278
TCL	01445
Telewest	01068
Time Warner cable	01877
Tangkock	00840
Lerox	00003
Toshiba 00000, 01509
trans PX	00275, 00303
TS	00025, 00333
United Cable	00276, 00033
US Electronics	00276, 00003, 00008
Videway	00000
Visiopass	00817
Zenith 00000, 00525, 00899

Cable/PVR Combination ※1

A	Americas	00859
D	Digos 01167
F	Trefcnx	01492
G	General Instrument	00810
J	Jarnold 00810
M	Motorola	01376, 00810, 01187
P	Paco	01877, 00237
S	Princsar	01877, 00877
	Scientific Atlanta	01877, 00877
	Sony	01036
	Supercable	00276
T	Time Warner cable	01877
Z	Zenith 00898

CD Player

A	Acoustic Research	40420
	Advantage	40032
	Alava	40152
	Arcam	40157
	Audio Research	40157
	Audiolab	40157
	Audiomega	40157
	Audiostar	40157
	AVI	40157

B	Balance Audio Technology	40157
	Burnester	40450
	Bush	40388
C	Calm	40157
	California Audio Labs	40025, 40303
	Cambridge	40157
	Cambridge Audio	40157
	Cambridge Soundbooks	40157
	Canver	40157, 40179
	CDC 40420
	ECD	40420
	Copland	40363
	Duris Machines	40032
	Cyrus	40157
D	Denon	40823, 40003, 40766, [42857]*, 42868
	DKK 40000
	DNX Electronics	40157
	Dual	40033
	Dynaco	40157
	Dynamic Bass	40179
F	Fisher	40000, 40179
G	Garard	40363, 40420
	Genova	40000, 40032, 40037, 40179
	Goldmund 40157
	Grundig	40157
	Heier	40173
	Hannan/Kardon	40150, 40157, 40173
	Hitachi 40032
I	Inkol	40157
	Integra 40101
J	Jerroiz 40003
	JVC	40032, 40072
K	Kenwood	40681, 40002, 40029, 40157, 40098, 40037, 40258, 40150
	KLH	11318
	Krill	40157
L	Linn	40157
	Lease	40157
	Lixman 40303
M	LXI	40179
	Magnevux	40157
	Marenz	40029, 40157
	Meiss 40157
	MCS	40029
	Memorex	40008, 40032, 40179, 40420, 40498
	Meridian	40157
	Micranega	40157
	Minc	40000
	Mission	40157

Modulaire	40008, 40002, 40087, 40179, 40120, 40468
MTC	40470
Musical Fidelity	40393
Myriad	40157
NAD	40000, 40721
Nain	40157
NSM 40157
Orkyo	40968, 40151
Optimus	40008, 40002, 40037, 40097, 40179, 40391, 40420, 40468
Orion	40393
Panasonic 40029, 40003, 40088, 40752
Paraspound	40420
Penney	40029
Philips	40157
Pioneer	40032, 40101, 40468
Polk Aardia	40157
Prasad	40420
Protar 40157
OEO	40157
Quad	40157
Quebec 40028
Radiola	40157
RadioShack	40008, 40002, 40179, 40420, 40468
RCA	40002, 40053, 40179, 40420, 40468
Roalistic	40008, 40002, 40087, 40179, 40120, 40468
Rustet	40157
Rovex	40157
Foksan	40420
Foxtal	40157, 40420
Royal	40420
SAE	40157
Sainsc	40000
Sanisil	40000, 40157
Sareya	40000, 40087, 40179
SAST	40157
Sears	40179
Sharp 40237
Siemens	40157
Silomic	40026
Sinusiduo	40157
Sonic Frontier	40157
Sony	40490, 40003, 40100, 41394, 40195
Sugden	40157
Sylvania	40157
TAG McLaron	40157
Tandy	40002
Tascam	40393, 40420
Teas 40430, 40393, 40420
Technics 40028, 40303
Itchwood 40033
Thomson 400s3
Thorans 40157
Thule Auto 40157
Tokai 40420
Unilextum 40157, 400s3
Victor 40072
Wadia 40393
Words	40000, 40052, 40157, 400s3, 40087, 40179
Yamaha 40490, 40668, 40032, 40036
Yanx 40001

CD Recorder

D	Denon 40768, 42869
J	JVC 40072
R	RCA 40353, 40420
S	Sary 40100, 40100, 41354
T	Teac 40420
	Thomson 40053

Tape Deck

A	Avex 2023, 20197, 2020, 21315
	Akai	20283, 20439
	Arcan	20076
	Audicial	20029
C	Carver 20029
D	Denon	20079, 20371, 21311, [22471]*
F	Fisher	20074
G	Garard	20308, 20309, 20375, 20439
	Genexxa 20439
	GoldStar	20375
	Grundig	20329, 20375
H	Hamian/Kardon	20182, 20229, 21314
I	Inkel	20070, 20211, 20337
J	JVC	20244, 20273, 20274, 20303, 20304, 20310, 21309
K	Karwood	20070, 20271, 20302, 20333, 20334, 21362
L	LG	20375
	Luxman	20308, 20309
M	Magnavix	20029
	Manara	20029, 20309
	Monorox	20089
	Mitsubishi 20283, 20339
	Myriad	20029
O	Onkyo	20135, 20136, 20262
	Optimus	20027, 20270, 20337, 20439
	Onion	20308, 20309

Palladium	20375
Panasonic	20229
Philips	20029, 20229
Phonotrend	20337
Pioneer	20027, 20220, 20059, 20109, 21306, 21312
Polk Audio	20029

R	Radola	20023
	RCA 20027, 20220
S	Revex	20023
	Sansui	20023, 20009
	Sanyo	20074
	Sharp 20231, 20371
	Sherwood	20337
	Sonic	20375
	Sony	20243, 20170, 20251, 20234, 21313

TaeKwang	20139
Landborg	20109
Taac	20280, 20283, 20289, 20318, 20309
Technics 20229
Technovix	20229
Throgens 20229

U	Universum	20575, 20439
V	Victor 20244, 20213, 20214
W	Werts 20021, 20029
	Whartedale	20431

Y	Yamaha 2000/, 20094

HDTV Tuner ※1

A	AOS 01272
	Accumen	01653
	Aliarwara	01272
C	CyberPower 01272
D	C-Link	01554
	Eglac 01363
E	Epson	01563
G	Gateway	01272
H	Howlett Packard	01272, 01267
	Howard Computers	01272
	HP	01272, 01267
	Bush	01272
I	iBUYPOWER	01272
L	LG	01415
	Linksys 01272, 01365
M	Media Center PC	01272
	Microsoft	01272, 01805
	Mind 01272
	Motorola	01363
N	Nirius Media	01272

P	Packard Bell	01272
	Panasonic 01120
	Pioneer	01010
R	Ricaviion	01272
S	Samsung	01190, 01490
	Sensary Science	01126
	Sharp 01010
	SMC 01456
	Sony 01272, 01324, 01364
	Stack 9	01272
	Sylvonia	01583
	Systemix	01272
T	Tagar Systems	01272
	Toshiba	01272
	Touch 01272
V	Viewatonic	01272, 01329
	Viciq	01126
	Voodoo 01272
X	Xbox	01805
Z	ZI Group	01272

Satellite Receiver

A	01300
iSKy	0134
A-Mark	00345
ABsat	00123, 00713
ADB	00642, 01259, 01367, 01418, 01473, 01491
AGS	00710
Alwa 01514
Altar 00200
Alka	00455, 00713, 01284, 01659, 01811
Allsat: 00200, 01043
Alltech	00713
Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412
AlphaStar	00772
Amtrarica	00713
Amstad	00345, 00713, 00795, 00847, 00863, 00882, 01113, 01175, 01693, 01801
Anglo 00713
Ankaro	00713
AntSat	01083
Apollo 00455
Apora 01043, 01075
Armstrong	00200
Amion 01300
Asat 00200
ASCI	01334
ASLF-00713
AssCom 00953

Astacom 00/10

Aston 00142
Astre	00713
Astrovoc	01745
Astro	00173, 00698, 01099, 01100, 01113
Atlantic Telephone	01333
Atsat	01300
AtSky 01334
Audioline	01672
Aurora	00842, 00879, 01333, 01433
Austar	00439, 00542, 00963, 00879, 01116, 01298
Axial 00710
Axil	01457, 01859
Axis 01111
B@cytonic	01112
Boko 00155
Bell ExpressVt	00775
Big Sat, 01457
Black Diamond	01284
Blaspunkt	00173
Blue Sky 00713
Boca	00713, 01232, 01366
Boston	00710, 01251
Brainwate, 00658, 01672
British Sky Broadcasting	00847, 01175, 01662, 01847
Broco	00713
BabyB	00847, 01175, 01662
BT	00710, 01236
Bute Sat	00713
Bush	01294, 01645, 01672, 01743, 01811
Canal	00953
Canal Digital	00853, 01822
Canal Satellite	00853, 01339, 01865
Canal+	00853
Centrex	01457
CSV 01413, 01567
Chapparel	00216
Cherokee	00123, 00710
Chess	00713, 01085, 01334, 01623
Chili 01718
CityCom	00295, 00394, 00818, 01075, 01176, 01232
Classic	01672
Cardinic	01413
CNS	01367
Conseq	01272, 01358, 01412, 01413
Concur	01700
Conia	01655
Contec	00854
Continental Edison	01695
Cosnip	01457

Crossdigital	01109
Crown	01254
Cytopvision	00455, 00795
Cytra 010/6
Cyrus	00200
D-box 00723, 00873, 01114
Deacoo	00713, 01111, 01236, 01743
Delta	00863
Deltaat	01075
Dyacc 01542, 01031, 01242
Digomius	00299
Digidentity	01365
Digifusion	01645, 01743
Diglogic	01784
DigiDest	00863, 01300, 01457, 01473
DigSat	01232
Digisley 01457
DiguAll World	01227
Digiturk	01076
Digitave	01631
Dijan 01296
DiPro	01367, 01549
	01377, 00362, 00566, 00638, 01639, 01147, 00247, 00748, 01749, 00774, 00819, 01856, 01076, 01108, 00099, 01109, 01414, 01442, 01639, 01392, 01540
DirecTV
	00710
Discovery	01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
Dien network System	01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
Dishpro	01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
Distratel	01283, 01704
DMT 01075
DNT 00203
Dream Multimedia	01237
DSE	01375
DSTV	00842, 00879, 01433
Durabrand	01284
DX Antenna 01530
	01505, 01005, 00775, 00435, 00810, 00713, 00853, 00871, 01266, 01200, 01323, 01405, 01418, 01473, 01775
Echostar
Firhell	00713
Flap 00/13, 01587
Estar 00/13
Elia	00200, 01659
Ernie Esoo	00971
Energy System	01631
Enol	00713, 01251
EP Sat	00456
Esat 00979
Erieult	00892
Eurocrypt. 00155
EuroLina 01251
Europa 00863
Euphon 00299
Fumsky 00262, 00299
Turstar 00018
Futcat 00113
Expressva 00775, 01775
Fannar 00712
Forgsson 00455, 01291, 01743
Finlandia 00435
Finlus 00345
Flair Mate 00713
FMG 01291, 01413, 01457
Force D1101
Fortec Star 01083
Foxtal 00455, 00497, 00755, 00878, 01162, 01176, 01356
Procapro Parnot 00971
Paciano 00125, 00871
Franca Telecom 00871
Freesat 00882
FTF 00883
FTEmaximal 00713, 00863
Fubo 00173, 00262, 00299, 00384, 01214, 01261, 01381
Fugonko 00125
Funai D1377
Galaxis 00853, 00863, 01107, 01111, 01557
Gandiner 00818
Gamot 01075
GbSAI 01214
GE 00392, 00566
Gogo 01412
General Instrument 00888
General Satellite 01178
GF Good Friends 01043
GF Star D1043
Gobo 01261, 01334, 01412, 01475, 01629
GOD Digital 00210
GOI 00775, 01775
Gold Box 00863
Gold Vision 01631
Golden Interstar 01283
GoldStar 00394
Goodmans 00155, 01294, 01291
Gradione 00887
Granada 00455
Grundig 00173, 00345, 00847, 00853, 00879, 01291
Handen D1922
Hanssatic D1089, 01100

Kauppauge	01672
H2	01214, 01801
H21	01159
Hills	01232
Forschmann	00125, 00173, 00259, 00710, 00692, 01076, 01111, 01232, 01417
Fisense	01535
Fitch	00243, 00819, 00859, 01250, 01284, 0158, 01523, 01575
Forecast 01714, 01680, 01700
Homer 01300
Houston 00775
HTS	00775, 01775
Hughes Network Systems	01142, 00749, 01749, 01442
Hunex	00863, 01176, 01225, 01406, 01427, 01675, 01743, 01790, 01915
Ruth 01075
Hyundai 01075, 01159
iCan	01387
ID Digital 01176
ILLUSION set	01557, 01631
Ilo	01435
Imperial	01334, 01429, 01672
Indivision	00887
Ingales 00882
Innova	00099
Inkstaur	01214
Iv Video 00671
Elky5	00887
Italien 00871
ITI Nokia	00455, 00723, 00873
Jadeworld 00642
Jaeger	01334
Jerrold	00895
Jiachou 01450
JOK	00710
JVC	00775, 01507, 01531, 01775
K-SAT	00113
Karra	00713
Kaon	01330
Kaifalco	01111
Karbren	00123, 00173, 00200, 00249, 00294, 00442, 00480, 00534, 00559, 00713, 00818, 01221, 01418, 01561, 01587
Korinex 00125
Korwood 00953
Klap	00710
Kosmoc TB	01333
Kisscom	01043
Kosmos	00442, 01333
Kreiling	00246, 00688

Kriselmeyer	00173
Kress	01895
L&S Electronic	01043, 01334
Langear	01206
LaSAT	00173, 00290
Law	01631
Legend	01718
Legrand	01718
Lemon	01334
Lennox 00713
Lennox	01811
LG	01075, 01414
Lreset	00299, 00713, 01043
Lodix	01764
Logik 01284
Logix	01075
Lonerton	00299
Luxor	00345, 00973
M Electronic	00918
M vision	01557
Magnavex	00724, 00727
Manata	00710, 00713
Manhattan	00456, 00710, 01083
Marantz 00200
Maspro	00173, 00713, 01530
Master's	00394
Marxai	00173, 00710, 01264, 01743
Maximan 01075, 01334, 01889
Melcrash 00963
MDS	01225
Mediabox 00853
Mediacom 01206
MediaSe 00853
Medior	00298, 00713, 01043, 01075, 01232, 01334, 01412, 01626
Medison	00713
Mega 00200
Memorax	00724
Merzanic	00713, 00619, 01263, 01334, 01575, 01702
Merz	00173
MiCO	01811
Micro 00713
Micro Elektronic	00713
Micro Technology	00713
Micromaxx	00299
Microstar 01075
Microtus	00713
Microsoft	00749, 00455
Morgan's	00200, 00713, 01232, 01412
Micronica 00889, 00856, 01473
MTES	01214

Multibroadcast	00642, 00879
Mul ticholica	01642, 00879, 01353, 01433, 01655, 01662
Mix Crude 01059
Mnyayd 00200
Mysar	00713
MySky	01633, 01843, 01850
NEC	01519
NEOTION	01334
Netgem	01222
Nutsat	00098, 00887
Nool TV 01322
Neahaus	00713
Nealing	01232
Neusat	00713
Navir	01859
Nexi Level	00869
Nisko	00203, 00713, 00723
Node Electronic	01704
Nokia	00455, 00723, 00751, 00853, 00873, 01023, 01223, 01723
Nordnende	00465, 01811
OstaTV	01505
Dikano	00442
Omega	00887
Opuntul	01232, 01412
Oplex	00384, 00713, 01043, 01283, 01611
Opimus	00124
Opus 00879
Orisis	01232, 01354, 01412
Dricktech	01093, 01100
Origo	00497
OSAI	00345
P/Sat	01232
Paco	00200, 00329, 00455, 00487, 00795, 00847, 00853, 00887, 01175, 01323, 01358, 01473, 01683, 01712, 01848, 01950
Pacific	01784, 01375
Packard Bell	01111
Packsat 00710
Paricom	00299, 01409
Paranox	01159
Parasat	00819, 00879, 01335, 01433
Parasomic	00247, 00401, 00455, 00847, 01204, 01404, 01568, 01526, 01527
Panda	00173, 00455
Pensat	01159
Pianot	00710
Paysat	00724
good Lion	01457

Philips	01142, 00749, 01745, 00775,00724, 00819, 01076, 00722,0059, 00710, 00455, 00816,00200, 00847, 00853, 00173,01114, 00133, 01442, 01043,01572
Phonotrend	00663, 01200
Filotime 01339
Pino	01334
Pioneer	01142, 00329, 00853, 01306,01442
Pfremet	00871
Plesmotic 00442
PM3 00713, 01611
Polymor 00394
Portland	01296
Preisner 00262, 01101, 01113, 01368
Premier	00723, 00853, 00873, 01429
Prima	00795
Primacomi	01111
Primosar	00869
Profile	00110
Pramax	00456
Proscan	00392, 00566
Proton	01535
DNS	01367, 01402, 01404
Quadral	00710
Quelle	00299
Radiola 00200
RadioShuck	00565, 00775, 00869
Radio	00394, 00882, 01113, 01317
RCA	00392, 00566, 01142, 00775,00855, 00143, 01291, 01392,01442
Rubox	01214
Rugel	01251
EFT	00200
Roadstar	00713, 00853
Rollmaster	01413
Rowar	00713
Rowsonnic 01567
SAB	01251
Saba	00710, 00820
Sabra 00456
Sagem	00820, 01114, 01253, 01307,01350
Samsung	01377, 01442, 01276, 01308,01100, 00853, 00863, 01206,01442, 01458, 01570, 01609,01700, 01816
Sat Control	01300
Sat loan 00713
SAI+	01409
Satos	00713
Satalco 01252
Satalus 01100
Satisfaction 01383
Schaub Lorenz 01214
Schneider 00710, 01206, 01251
Schweiger	00394, 00504, 00853, 01075, 01083, 01111, 01317, 01334, 01417, 01457
SCC 00299
Sadaa Electronique 00125, 01206, 01283, 01826
STC 01075, 01087, 01251, 01826
Selecro 00871
Sapiano 01375
Sard 01412
Sarino 00610
Serviner 01611
ServSat 00713, 01251
Sharp 01517
Sternans 00173, 01334, 01429
Silva 00299
Skartin	00713
SKF 00713
SKY	00850, 00999, 00847, 00897, 01014, 01175, 01867, 01633, 01847, 01848, 01850
SKY Italia	00853, 01690, 01647, 01848
Sky Television	01014
Sky XL	01251, 01412
Sky 01125
Seymaster	00713, 01075, 01085, 01230, 01334, 01409, 01687, 01611
Seymax	00200
Sepplus 01252, 01334, 01412
SkySat	00713
Seyvision	01334
SL	00298, 01672
SM Electronic	00713, 01200, 01409
Smur	00713, 00882, 01101, 01113, 01232, 01404, 01413
Sony	00833, 01659, 00455, 00847, 00853, 01524, 01358, 01640
Star 00887
Star Choice	00869
Star Trak 00772, 00889
Starland	00713
Starlite	00200
Stroom	01847, 01849
Strong	00129, 00173, 00820, 00853, 00879, 01159, 01264, 01300, 01409, 01826
Sarker 00123
Sunny	01300
Sunset	00713
Sunstar	00692
Supernova	00897
SVA 01455
Systec	01334

T	Tanac	00455
	Tarus	01225
	Itung 00455
	Boston	01669
	Tasic	01225, 01227, 01251, 01322
	Tecartal	01200
	TechniSat	00762, 00455, 00863, 01089, 01100, 01195, 01197, 01322
	Techtronic	01293, 01610
	Techrosonic	01672
	Techmultrund	01429
	Techwood	01294, 01626
	Tele System Electronic	01251, 01400, 01611, 01831
	Telecel	01043
	TeleClub	01387
	TeleUnion	00710
	Tokio	00292, 00442
	Telestar	01090, 01100, 01251, 01334, 01610, 01826
	Telesystem	01801
	Televes	00455, 01214, 01300, 01334
	Televisa	00837
	Televira 01232
	Tavion 00713, 01409, 01622, 01672
	Thomson	00392, 00566, 00455, 00710, 00713, 00820, 00847, 00853, 01043, 01175, 01291, 01534, 01543, 01662
	Thorn	00455
	Tiny	01672
	Tioka 00394
	Tivo	01142, 01442
	Tokai 00200
	Tanna	00455, 00713, 01811
	Topfield	01206, 01238, 01545, 01783
	Toshiba	00749, 01749, 00790, 00819, 00455, 01285, 01501, 01516, 01530
	TPS	00820, 01253, 01307
	Triax	00200, 00713, 00853, 01113, 01272, 01251, 01291, 01296, 01629
	Trio	01075
	TEmcim 01429
	Tunsat	00113
	Twinter	00113, 01611
	UEC 00879, 01162, 01333, 01356
	Univarly	01382, 01640
	London	00724, 00722
	Unisat	00200
	United	01251
	Universal	00173, 00299, 01087, 01095, 01251
	US Digital	01535
	USDIV 01535

V	Variosat	0173
	Ventana	0203
	Vestul	01251
	VH Sar	00290
	Viasat	01682
	ViewSat 01232
	Visionic	0012a, 01263
	VisionNet	01557
	Visosat	00142, 00710, 00713, 01413, 01457, 01118
	Viva	00853
	Vivid	01162
	Vieon	00863
	VTech	00818
W	Wavelength	01232, 01413
	Wave	00455
	Wharlsada	01284
	Winbox	01801
	Winal 00299
	Wis	00173, 00293, 00455
	Worldsat	00123, 00710, 01214, 01251, 01543
X	Xcom	00123
	XMS	01075
	Xcel	00123, 00113, 00847, 01214, 01323
	Xtreme	01300
Y	Yakumo	01413
	Yanada	01218
	Yes	00887
Z	Zelnder	00394, 00508, 00818, 01075, 01232, 01251, 01334, 01412, 01413
	Zenith	00856, 01856
	Zeta Technology	00200
	Zodiac	01801

Satellite Receiver/PVR Combination ※1, ※3

A	@sat	01300
	Allvision 01412
	Amstrad	01175
	Atsat	01300
B	DeSyrtonic 01412
	British Sky Broadcasting	01175
	RoskyB	01175, 01862
	Bush	01645
C	Canal Satellite	01339
	Comag	01412
D	Digitsson	01645
	DigQuest	01300
	Digitunk 01076

	DirecTV	01377, 00392, 00639, 01142, 01056, 00093, 01302, 01442, 01616
	Dish Network System	01505, 00775
	Dishpro	01505, 00775
	DMT D1075
E	Dream Multimedia	01237
	Enerstar 01505, 00775, 00610
	Ecorassau 00775
F	Foxal	01350
G	GLSAT 01214
	Gecca	01412
	Globa 01412
H	HOT	01158
	Hirschmann	01412
	Homcast	01680
	Hughes Network Systems	01142, 01442
	Himax	01176, 01427, 01675
	Huch 01675
	Hyundai	01075, 01159
K	Kaon	01300
	Katheln	00249, 00658, 01221, 01561
L	LG	01075
	Maximum	01354
	Mediacom	01206
	Median 01412
	Microstar 01075
	Morgan's 01412
	Motorola	00869
	MYEC	01214
	Mu Iuchioka	01333, 01559, 01560
	MySky 01693, 01848, 01950
N	NEUTION	01334
	Nokia 01023
O	Operatel 01412
	Orais 01412
P	Pace 01175, 01356, 01423, 01850
	Panasonic	01304
	Phiips	01142, 00099, 01442
	Pilotine	01339
	Proscan	00392
R	Radio	01317
	RCA	01392
	Robbox	01214
S	Sagem	01253, 01307
	Samsung	01206, 01442, 01570, 01609
	Sat Control	01300
	Schneider 01208
	Schwinger	01075, 01412
	Soleda Electronique	01206
	Sand 01412
	SKY 01175, 01393, 01348, 01850

SKY Italia	01843
Sky XL	01412
Skymaster	01075
Seymour 01412
Sony	02633, 01640
Star Choice	00869
Strang	01300
Sunny	01300
TechSal	01106, 01167
Thomson	01175, 01534, 01902
Iolofield 01206, 01545, 01793
TPS	01253, 01307
Xtreme	01300
Zefinder	01075, 01412

Television

A	868	10264
	A-Mark	10047, 10054, 10039
	A.R. Systems	10057, 10062, 10074, 10445, 10546
	Accent	10009, 10037
	Acoustic	10047
	Acoustrovel	10001
	Acoustic Research	11269
	Action	10000, 10050
	Acura	10008
	Addison	10092, 10108, 10653
	ADL	11217
	Amiral	10047, 10054, 10017, 10051, 10053, 10463, 10193, 10163, 10264, 10618
	Advent	10761, 10783, 10815, 10817, 10842, 10876, 11933
	Adventuri 10000
	Acrysan	10217
	ACG 11183, 11556
	Agashi	10217, 10264
	Agna 10150
	Aiko	10092, 10094, 10095, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10331, 10371, 10433
	Airo	10206, 10037, 10455, 10805
	Arwin 10264, 10701, 11904, 11911
	Akai	10000, 10050, 10812, 10792, 10178, 10030, 10145, 10002, 10066, 10631, 10698, 10672, 10714, 10715, 11207, 11537, 11875, 11936, 11931, 11559, 10548, 10680, 10435, 10371, 10361, 10254, 10218, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10007, 10005, 10009
Akashi 10009, 10360
Akiba 10037, 10218, 10455
Akira 10419
Akira 10037
Akura	10171, 10209, 10037, 10193, 10218, 10264, 10069, 10014, 11037, 11408, 11356, 11987
Akaron 10170
Akira	10009, 10256, 10037, 10073, 10163, 10218, 10352, 10370, 10371, 10418, 10443, 10497, 10663, 10714, 11037
Akouton 10700, 10943
Avide 10672
Ai-Tel 10665, 11269
Ai-oran 10030, 10170
Ai-organ 10217
Ai-star 10257
Ambassador 10150
Amirisa Action 10190
American High 10000, 10060
Amphivision 10217, 10370
Amstrad	10000, 10171, 10009, 10011, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10234, 10367, 10371, 10433, 10648, 11037, 11562
Amtron 10000, 10190
Anam	10250, 10180, 10009, 10037, 10700, 10861
Anam National 10250, 10037, 10550
Anderson 11140, 11183
Anglo 10009, 10264
Antua	10051
Amiluchi	10009, 10037, 10264
Ansonic	10009, 10037, 10163, 10370, 10374, 10668
AOC	10451, 10593, 10190, 10090, 10178, 10330, 10082, 10009, 10108
Aolimpio	10254
Apox Digital	10156, 10748, 10879, 10785, 10767, 11217, 11943
AR	10352, 10566
Arc En Ciel	10109
Arcam 10217
Ardena 10037, 10714
Aristocrat	10163
Aristone	10037, 12566
ART	11037
Arthur Martin	10163
ASA	10070
Asberg	10037
Aacre 10009
Aatra	10037
Asaka	10217, 10218, 10264
A/U	10099
Atlantic	10001, 10037

Aioni	10009
Auchan	10153
Audirac	10190
Audiosonip	13003, 10037, 10109, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10370, 10374, 10485, 10714, 10715, 10820
Audicion	10217, 10264, 10370, 10486
Audiovox	10451, 10180, 10029, 10673, 10692, 10875, 11357, 11351, 11552
Audiowerk	10636
Aunark	10050
Autowax	10217
Avantura	10171
AVF	10000
Awa	10451, 10009, 10011, 10036, 10108, 10217, 10264, 10374, 10305
Axion 11937, 11958
Axsent	10005
Baior 10879
Balho 10009, 10254
Baile	10001, 10005, 10374, 10861
Baird	10037, 10073, 10109, 10238, 10217, 10343, 11196
Bang & Clufsen	10585
Bachuash	10254
Bashang	10009, 10817
Barco 10163, 10556
Basic Lime	10000, 10057, 10163, 10214, 10218, 10374, 10455, 10558, 10668, 11037, 11163
Baside	10217
Bauer 10805
Baur	10037, 10195, 10361, 10455, 10512
Daysonic	10190
Bain	10217
Beaunmark	10017, 10178, 10300
Beijing	10812, 10001, 10009, 10238, 10228, 10264, 10374, 10681, 10817, 10821
Beiko	10037, 10195, 10370, 10418, 10485, 10606, 10714, 10715, 10808, 11057
Balcor	10030
Ball & Howell	10054, 10017, 10154, 10293
Belson 10638, 11131
Belstar 11037
BerO	11037, 11/98
Boon 10037, 10163, 10218, 10418
Berhen 10636
Best	10370
Bestar 10037, 10370, 10374
Bestar Daswoo 10074
Binolong	10217
Black Diamond	10014, 10820, 10821, 11037, 11163, 11809

Blackway	10218
Blaupunkt	10308, 10170, 10195, 10210, 10227, 10455
Blue Sky	10307, 10218, 10455, 10457, 10498, 10556, 10568, 10714, 10715, 11037, 11051, 11083
Boots 12003, 10217
BPL	10037, 10208
Bradford 10160
Brandt	10109, 10287, 1035a, 10660, 10625, 10714
Brinkmann 10037, 10418, 10485, 10568
Brionwaga 10037, 10262
Eriamie	10217
Brockwood	10178, 10230
Erogsunic	10238, 10463, 10160, 11911, 11938
Brother 10264
BSR	10163
BTC	10218
Bush	11900, 11556, 11937, 10678, 10714, 10898, 10868, 10661, 10614, 10556, 10487, 10974, 10570, 10361, 1035a, 10964, 10218, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10037, 10036, 10009
Cahong	10009, 10817
Ceiling	10748
Candle	10030
Caston	10218
Cauchart	10017, 10178, 10030, 10052, 10008
Caesacronic	10030
Caesamic	10264
Corad	10010, 10688, 11007
Corona	10037, 10455
Camkale	10030
Camelour	10036, 10037, 10070
Cerver 13054, 10170
Cascade	10009, 10037
Casco	10037
Cathay	10037, 10218
CCE 10037, 10217
Celebrity	10000
Celera 1046a
Celestial	10467, 10819, 10820, 10821
Centrex	10780
Centrum 11037
Centurion	10037
CCE	10074, 10163, 10370, 10418
Changcheng	10051, 10001, 10009, 10254, 10374, 10661, 10817
Changlei	10009, 10037, 10817
Changleng	10064, 10817
Changrai	10009, 10817

	10158	10765	10009	10264
Changdong	10508	10767	10763	10817
	10818	10820	10821	11008
	11156
Changdu	10009	10817
Ching Tai	10092	10098
Chun Yun	10000	10180	10092	10009
	10300	10843
Chunfeng	10009	10264
Chung Hsin	10180	10553	10036	10108
Chunsun 10009.10817
Chinline	10009	10218
Chinma	10672
Chinmai 10451, 10092
Chux	10648	11556
Chux 10047
Dizan	10064	10000	10451	10463
	10180	10060	10030	10171
	10092	10001	10035
City	10009
Diaries	10180
Diaryox	10037	10070	10418
Classic	10030	10052	10459
Darmonic	10005	10037	10217	10218
	10264	10370	10371	10714
Dayton	11037
DMS Highted	10217
Colonyne	10047	10054	10071	10080
	10178	10000
Commercial Solutions	11427	10047
Concede	10009
Contor	10009	10037	10264	10370
	10418
Conia 10825, 10821, 11498
Conic	10178
Conrae	10809
Conruva	10156	10145	10009	10264
	10698	11156	11170
Contas	10180	10000	10036	10007
Continental Edison	10103	10267	10437
Cosmel	10009	10057
Craig 10180, 10171
Erosley	10064	10000	10180	10030
	10171	10074	10163	10070
	10003	10180	10053	10009
Brown	10007	10209	10370	10418
	10436	10497	10606	10672
	10/12	10/14	10/15	11037
Brown Mustang	10672
CS Electronics	10218
CTX	11456
Curis Mathes	10047	10054	10154	10000
	10061	10451	10093	10160
	10060	10702	10178	10030
	10145	10165	10037	10035
	11147	11347
EXC	10180
Cybertrun	10218
Dycomix	11299

Dewoo	10154, 10451, 10180, 10178, 10036, 10092, 11661, 10634, 10661, 10672, 10700, 10960, 10895, 10875, 10880, 11755, 11756, 11600, 10623, 10656, 10498, 10374, 10264, 10278, 10217, 10170, 10109, 10108, 10037, 10038, 10003
Delnichi	10218
Densai	10005, 10035, 10035, 10037, 10238, 10217
Dentux 10370, 10488, 10714, 10715
Detaura	10208
Denya 10008, 10037
Dayuk	10672, 11207
Dayun	10192, 10009, 11207
Dayton	10190, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10005, 10035, 10037, 10074
Dayu	10374, 10861
De Graaf	10163, 10208, 10548
Decca	10037, 10217
Degraff	10163, 10208
Deitron	10374
Dell	11083, 11178
Denko	10264
Denor	10145, 10511
Denver	10037, 10587
Desmir	10009, 10037
Diamant	10037
Diamond	10708, 10008, 10371, 10572, 10638, 10620, 10660
Dupaton 10037
Dupline	10037, 10068
Digital Life	10672
Digitex	10820
Digitor	10037
Digix Media	10880
Dki	10009, 10037, 10217
DL	10587, 10780, 10872
Domos	10669
Dormland	10394
Dongda	10009
Dongbai	10009
Dream Vision	11164, 11704
DSE	10698, 10820, 11556
DIS	10008
Dcal	10037, 10217, 10343, 10352, 10394, 10307, 11137
Dual Tec	10217
Dumont	10017, 10180, 10178, 10070, 10217
Dursbrand	10433, 10180, 10178, 10171, 11034, 11453
Dix	10037
Dwin 10099
Dynatoch	10217
Dynatron	10037

D

PRESET CODE

Easy Living 112/18
Eaton 10060
Locus 10773
FCF 10037
Fistson-Minerva 10487
Fliba	10337, 10217, 10218, 10352, 103610
Biot 10163
Electrobond 10000
Electragraph 11256
Electrohome	10154, 10000, 10463, 10150, 10178, 10250, 10073
Desta 10005, 10264
Dhunk 11007, 11208
DiG 10037
Ein 10009, 10037, 10361, 10549
Blue 10007, 10218
Elar 10005, 10264
Emorale 10179
Emerson	10347, 10017, 10154, 10451, 10238, 10463, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10171, 11344, 11911, 11900, 10714, 10668, 10623, 10486, 10256, 10371, 10370, 10361, 10257, 10155, 10170, 10070, 10073
Envision 10030, 10813
Fraser 10850
Frae	113/1
Fras	10037
ESA	10812, 10171, 11947
LSC	10037, 10217
Elier 10030, 10009
Elier 10001, 10009, 10163, 10820
Eurolod 10217, 10254
Euroman	10037, 10217, 10264, 10370
Europa	10037
Europilon	10037, 10109, 10217
Everham Technology	11248
Evolution	11756
Expert	10192
Exquist	10037
Feilang	10009
Feliu 10009, 10817
Feiyan	10294
Fayue	10009, 10817
Farmer 10009, 10374
Ford	10335
Ferguson	10353, 10037, 10073, 10139, 10195, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10443, 10548, 10560, 10625, 11037
Fidelity	10171, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10264, 10361, 10371, 10512
Fisai	10217
Finlandia	10163, 10208, 10346, 10351, 10548

	10307	10370	10163	10217
Finlux	10348	10480	10556	10631
	10714	10715	10808	11556
Firstar	10236	10008
Firstline	10008	10037	10028	10217
	10361	10374	10556	10638
	10714	10808	11027	11131
	11363	11371
Fisher	10047	10054	10154	10000
	10039	10208	10217	10031
	10373
Flint	10034	10218	10264	10455
	10610
Force 1149
Farmerid	10037	10163
Fartheras	10035
Fraba	10037	10370
Frac	10009	10037	10370	10459
	10610
Frontach	10009	10163	10217	10264
Fujiureo	10005	11498
Fujiusu	10008	10217	10052	10693
	10809	10953
Fujiusu General	10005	10217	10683
Fujiusu Siemens	10038	10805	11163	11298
Furai	10000	10180	10171	10254
	10668	11271	11304
Furi 1014a, 10264, 10817
Furiishi	10860
Futronic	10954	10860
Futuratach	10180
Galaxo	10037
Galaxo 10037, 10370
Ganxin	10817
Galoway	11755	11756
GBC 10009, 10163, 10218, 10374
GE	11472	10047	11454	10000
	10351	10451	10553	10190
	10063	10178	10390	10092
	11522	11617	11347	11147
	10625	10560	10335	10035
GEC	10037	10163	10217	10361
Gelasa	10005	10163	10374
Genini	10047
General	10125	10287
General Technic	10009
Genesis	10005	10037
Genexos	10005	10037	10163	10218
Gencom	10808	10865	10980	11217
	11298
Govalt	11371
Govt. 10009, 10217
GovStar	10017	10000	10300
Go Video	10050	10886
Go Vision	11937
Goldfunk	10658
GoldStar	10047	10054	10154	10178
	10333	10715	10714	10626
	10455	10361	10217	10183
	10109	10573	10037	10006
	10000	10001

Goodman's	10000, 11000, 11000, 11163, 11037, 10880, 10908, 10714, 10668, 10661, 10534, 10525, 10587, 10560, 10546, 10459, 10487, 10480, 10374, 10371, 10343, 10335, 10264, 10218, 10212, 10257, 10236, 10035, 10011, 10009
Goreyra	10370
GFM	10218
Gradiente	10253, 10357, 10170
Green	10163, 10361, 10371, 10467, 10214, 11163
Gran Prox	10048
Granada	10008, 10037, 10108, 10183, 10208, 10217, 10226, 10343, 10548, 10560
Grancin	10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10374, 10455, 10610, 10668, 10714, 10715, 10865, 10880, 11037, 11191
Gronic	10217
Grundig	10706, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10070, 10163, 10195, 10443, 10487, 10566, 10587, 10672, 10683, 11271
Grundy	10180, 10195
Grunkel	11163
Grumpy	10180
H & B	10809
Haze	10706
Haier	11034, 10037, 10508, 10687, 10698, 11017
Haihong	10009
Haiyen	10264, 10817
Halifax	10217, 10264
Hallmark	10238, 10180, 10178
Hampton	10217
Hannmex 10218
Hankout	10180, 10178, 10030
Harseatico	10009, 10037, 10217, 10361, 10373, 10394, 10489, 10556, 10634, 10661, 10714, 10808
Hartanex	10009, 10037, 10985
Harbor 10037
Harley Davidson	10009, 10180, 10060, 10148, 10083, 11004
Hamran/Karpon	10054
Harpei	10065
Harvard	10180
Harwa	10773, 11196, 11299
Harwood	10009, 10037, 10497
Harceuge	10037
Harmony	10093
HCM	10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10419
Hashiok	10217
Helios	10865
Hello Kitty	10451

Hama	10009, 10217
Howlet Packard	11495, 11502
Hilvux 10109
Highline	10237, 10264
Hikona	10218
Ilikena	10218
Hiran	10009, 10038, 10037, 10163, 10208, 10218, 10264, 10352, 10342
Hisawa	10218, 10455, 10610, 10714
Hisense	10156, 10749, 10145, 10009, 10208, 10508, 10556, 10760, 10821, 10882, 11022, 11156, 11170, 11209, 11363
Hitachi	10097, 10054, 10017, 10000, 11256, 10156, 10051, 10150, 10176, 10003, 10033, 11145, 10145, 10092, 10744, 10877, 10634, 11037, 11137, 11149, 11156, 11170, 11225, 11576, 11904, 11950, 10578, 10548, 10608, 10498, 10481, 10480, 10343, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10108, 10097, 10036, 10353, 10009
Hitachi Fujian	10150, 10108, 10950
Hiras 10658
Hisa	10009, 10218, 10155, 10610
Itaher	10214, 10865, 11185, 11558
Home Electronics	10806
Hongmei	10093, 10009, 10254, 10817
Hongyan	10264, 10817
Hormphor	10037
Heshai	10218, 10455
HP	11494, 11502
Ihas Tun 10009
Iluafa	10145, 10009
Huanghaimei	10009
Huanghe	10009, 10817
Huanglong	10009, 10017
Huangshen 10009, 10264, 10917
Huangya	10217, 10264, 10374, 10817
Huangjing	10262
Huadi	10145, 10764
Hugusan	11717
Hyundaij	10051
Hygash	10217
Hyper	10009, 10217
Hypersano	10361
Hyssun	10007, 10217, 10264, 10455, 10496, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037
Hyundai	10849, 10863, 10865, 10976, 11558
Iberia 10007
ICE	10007, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371
ICas	10218
Ilyana	10877, 11217

Ima	10238, 10180, 10178
Imperial	10037, 10074, 10070, 10018
Imperial Crown	10001, 10009, 10254, 10374, 10561
Indiana 10037
Infinity 10054
InFocus	11164
Inpeler 10183, 10487, 10610, 10714
Inporso	10009
Inno Hit	10009, 10217, 10218, 11153
Innova	10037
Innovext	10063, 11299
Innotech 10773, 10820
Insignia	10171, 11517
Intec	10017, 10145
Incarboy	10009, 10037, 10254
Incurfunk	10037, 10109, 10133, 10200, 10237, 10381, 10512
Intramai	10037, 11909
Inunivison	10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10384, 10455, 10496, 10487
Inredic	10009, 10037, 10218, 10371
Isukai	10037, 10218, 10455
ITC 10217
ITS	10037, 10218, 10264, 10371
ITT	10163, 10228, 10346, 10361, 10490, 10548, 10610
ITT Nokia	10070, 10163, 10195, 10208, 10346, 10381, 10430, 10548, 10506, 10610
ITV	10037, 10264, 10374
IX	10677
JBL	10054
JCB	10000
JCV	11882
Jean	10156, 10051, 10236, 10092, 10009, 10036
JFC 10235
Jensen	10761, 10815, 10817, 11035
Jiabura 10051
JialiCal	10009, 10264
Jill	10030
Jirifeng	10051, 10208, 10226, 10317
Jinque 10009, 10264, 10817
Jinta	10009, 10264
Jinsing	10054, 10156, 10195, 10009, 10037, 10264, 10558, 10699, 10817, 10821, 11011
JNIE	10443, 10499, 10556, 10634
JNC 10676
Jocul 10712
Johnson	10455
Jubilee 10558
Juhua	10264, 10817
Jujan	10030

K

JVC	10354, 10393, 10403, 10053, 10350, 10370, 10036, 10218, 10371, 10418, 10508, 10625, 10850, 10853, 10693, 10731, 11263, 11283
Kaije 10009, 10294, 10817
Kaisui	10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10450
Kanbrook 10217
Kamp 10017, 10180, 10217
Kargli	10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661, 10817
Kangye 10009, 10264
Kapsch 10163, 10061
Kanchor	10364, 10370, 10606, 10610, 10714, 10778, 11356
Kathrein 10568
Kawa 10371
Kawasnic 10030
KB Aristocrat 10163
KDS 11488
KEC 10180, 10080
Kendo	10357, 10362, 10370, 10610, 10649, 11037
Kennedy 10163
Kennex 10658, 11037
Kanwood 10180, 10080
Kaind 10766
KIC 10217
Kiota 10001, 10371, 10455
Kiote 10766, 10566
Kiton 10371, 10663
KLH	10150, 10180, 10765, 10797, 11862
KLL	10037
Kloss	10000
Knüssel	10357, 10362, 10370, 10374, 10499, 10556, 10610
Köllin	10180, 10190, 10053, 10095, 10108, 11331
Kalster	10037, 10218
Konque	10009, 10264, 10817
Konichi	10005
Kanig 10007
Karke	10180, 10257, 10218, 10371, 10418, 10567, 10641, 10714, 10817, 11084
Koraki	10497
Kurpi	10037
Karling 10370
Kosnos	10037
Kayoda	10009
Koisan	10876
KTV 10463, 10180, 10080, 10217
Kuale	10005, 10264
Kulun 10009
Kurkun	10264, 10268, 10226, 10234, 10374, 10661, 10817

L

Kyoto 1018
Kyoto 10163, 10217
LBS Electronic	10714, 10809, 10865
Lark	10154
LaS&T	10488
Lasix	11037
Leader 10009
Larsen	10037
Legend	10005
Lance 10037, 10374, 10587
Lanox	10009
Luxor	11186
Leyoa 10037, 10284
	10354, 11205, '0090, 10178, 10330, 11798, 11837, 11191, 11778, 10856, '0156, 10714, 10700, 10898, '0056, 10370, 10361, 10217, '0103, 10129, 10108, 10037, '0039, 10001
LG
	10097
Lieosinkoter	10037, 10327
	10009, 10037, '0218, 10374, 10368, 10583, '0714, 11037, 11137
Lilatac	10817
	10238, 10190, '0030, 10001, 10003, 11504
Lihua
	10005, 10208, 10602
Lloyd's
	10036
Local India TV
	10036, 10036, 10036
Local Malaysia TV
Laoise 11037
Lowea	10337, 10370, '0512, 10633, 10790
	10238, 10190, '0069, 10001, 10008, 10511, '0071, 10698, 10773, 10809, '1037, 11217
Logix
	10264, 10817
Lukar	11982
Luna	10003, 10163, '0362, 10374, 11037
	10337, 10573, '0165, 10217, 10264, 10651, 10556
Lumaton
Lux May 10009, 10037
	10163, 10208, '0217, 10348, 10361, 10490, '0548, 10631, 11037, 11163
Luxor	10347, 10254, '0317, 10154, 10300, 10156, '0051, 10083, 10361, 10253, 10178, 10030, 10174, 10166, '0037, 10036, 10305, 10001, '0208
IXI
	10009, 10037, '0109, 10183, 10195, 10217, '0267, 10043, 10345, 10374, '0480, 10612, 10834, 10861, '0714
M Electronic
Madison 10037
MA6 11498
Magradyne	10054, 10163
Magnalon	10073
Magnasonic	10064, 10000, '0156, 10033, 10030, 10092, '0109

Magnavox	10067, 11454, 10054, 1015410000, 10260, 10051, 10180,10060, 10330, 10171, 1009210706, 11944, 11904, 1175511254, 10802, 10760, 10011,10035, 10037, 10036
Magnum	10037, 10648, 10714, 10715
Majestic 10017
Mander	10264
Manesth	10035, 10037, 10017, 10294
Manhattan	10032, 10668, 10718, 10816,11037, 11267
Morantz	11454, 10054, 10030, 10037,10556, 10704, 10855
Mark	10098, 10037, 10027, 10074,10714, 10715
Masur's 10499
Masur's 10053, 10796, 10698, 10780
Masuda	10008, 10037, 10027, 1002180284, 10371
Masui	11037, 10744, 10016, 10556,10497, 10455, 10443, 10433,10371, 10252, 10035, 10217,10208, 10105, 10163, 10037,10038, 10035, 10011, 10009
Marsushita	10250, 10051, 10650
Maxdorf 10373
Maxent	11755, 11756
Maxim	11556, 11382
MCE	10009
Meck	10094
Mediatar	10037, 10056
Medion	10037, 10512, 10556, 10688,10698, 10714, 10808, 10890,11037, 11137, 11748, 11300
Mogapower	10700
Mogas	10610
Mopalton 10047, 10178, 10145, 10009
MLI	11037
Mella 10254, 10817
Monerux	10154, 10250, 10463, 10180,10150, 10060, 10178, 10030,10008, 10035, 10037, 10155,10877, 11037, 11811
Memphis 10009
Mercury	10060, 10001, 10009, 10007
Mermaid	10037
Metronic 10E25
Meta	10037, 10194, 10067, 10088,10447, 10987, 10868, 10746,11163
MGA	10150, 10179, 10030, 10218,10574
MEN Technology	10179
Micro Genius	10150
Micromaxx	10037, 10668, 10714, 10808,11037
Microstar	10088
MicroTEK	10230, 10860
Midland	10047, 10017, 10051
Mikumi	11037, 11149

Minato 10037, 10556
Minona	10070, 10108, 10195, 10497
Minoka	10037
Mirror	11900
	10154, 10250, 10393, 10336, 10130, 11240, 10150, 10128, 10030, 11917, 11037, 10836, 10817, 10565, 10612, 10195, 10106, 10037, 10036, 10011
Mitsubishi	10037, 10117, 11037, 10836, 10817, 10565, 10612, 10195, 10106, 10037, 10036, 10011
Mitar 10217
Monaca	10003
Monivision	10700, 10943
Morgan's 10037
Mozkova	10054, 10051, 10093, 10130, 10130, 10063, 10030, 10092, 10011, 10370, 10512
MTC	10130, 10063, 10030, 10092, 10011, 10370, 10512
MTloguc	10214
Mudan	10051, 10008, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817
Muizboc	10037, 10485, 10668, 11037, 11556
Muizboch	10130, 10008, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10370, 10489
Murphy	10163
Musikland	10218
Mx Enda	11498
Mvyad	10565
NAD	10156, 10178, 10166, 10037, 10361, 10865, 11156
Naiko 10037, 10506, 11982
Natimura	10037, 10374
Nanbao	10009, 10264
Nansheng	10264, 10817
Narita	11982
NAI	10225
National 10051, 10208, 10225, 10508
NEC	10037, 10154, 10156, 10051, 10052, 10179, 10030, 11754, 11270, 11170, 10817, 10704, 10661, 10633, 10508, 10459, 10455, 10370, 10264, 10217, 10170, 10035, 10011, 10009
Neckemann	10037, 10200, 10327, 10370, 10416, 10566
NEI	10257, 10163, 10371
Neovia	10865, 10876, 11371
Netset 10037
NetTV	11753
Neufunk	10008, 10037, 10218, 10556, 10616, 10714
New Tech	10008, 10037, 10217, 10343, 10268
Now World	10218
Nowave	10030, 10178, 10092, 10009
Nikai	10008, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10264
Nikai	10214
Nikao	10178, 10030, 10082
Nikodo	10178, 10030, 10092

Nishi 10330
Nokiko	10073
Nogensalic	10109
Nokia	10152, 10208, 10348, 10361, 10374, 10490, 10548, 10506, 10610, 10631
Norcent 10748, 10824
Nordic 10217
Nordemonte	10037, 10108, 10195, 10267, 10343, 10560, 10714
Nomenei 10037
Nomatronic	10037, 10374
NTC	10092
NuTec	10490, 10598, 10620
Nyon 10200
Omicenic 10153, 10208, 10361, 10548
Ocean	10264
Okano	10009, 10057, 10264, 10370
Olova	11144, 11240, 11331, 11610
Ornaga	10264
Ornal 10748, 10868, 10730, 10872
Ornda 10053, 11253
Orimax	10714
Oreva	10180, 10219, 10371, 10433, 10632
Opera	10037
Optimus	10154, 10250, 10393, 10180, 10150, 10178, 10330, 10166, 10646
Uploma	10887
Uplornica	10093
Urbi	10037
Urcorn	11504
Orion	10017, 10238, 10463, 10180, 10178, 11463, 10011, 10037, 10294, 10443, 10556, 10714, 10880, 11195, 11611
Urino	10037, 10218
Ormond	10668, 11037
Osaki	10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10374, 10568
Oslo	10037
Dss	10218
Osune	10036, 10057, 10218
Orle 11498
Orto Versand	10033, 10035, 10037, 10109, 10195, 10217, 10226, 10343, 10361, 10517, 10556
Paco	10092
Pacific	10037, 10443, 10556, 10714, 11097, 11137
Paladium	10037, 10163, 10200, 10217, 10327, 10370, 10419, 10556, 10714, 11137
Pelsonic	10001, 10007, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10419, 10698, 10773, 10778, 11195, 11263, 11304
Panama 10029, 10037, 10217, 10264
Panagiba	17001
Panasonic	10354, 10000, 10156, 10250, 10354, 10236, 10330, 11947, 11845, 11841, 11880, 11310, 11291, 11271, 10953, 10650, 10548, 10608, 10387, 10381, 10225, 10268, 10183, 10105, 10037, 10035
Panavision 10037
Panda	10054, 10706, 10059, 10295, 10228, 10264, 10628, 10635, 10780, 10817, 10821
Pathe Cinema 10163
Pathe Marconi 10109
Fausa 10029
Foxonic 10080, 10000
PCF 10158, 10260
Penney	10047, 10000, 10156, 10250, 10354, 10380, 10145, 10030, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10070, 10078, 11347
Perchio 10037, 10155
Perfekt 10037
Perurs 11523
Philes	10054, 10451, 10483, 10180, 10178, 10230, 10145, 11651, 10032, 10074, 10163, 10370, 10418
Philthermonic 10217
Philips	11454, 10054, 10012, 10000, 10054, 10178, 10230, 10171, 10092, 11861, 11756, 11254, 10890, 10956, 10612, 10374, 10361, 10343, 10200, 10135, 10037, 10009
Phocus 10/14
Phoenix 10037, 10163, 10370, 10496
Phonia 10037, 10556
Pilot	10054, 10060, 10178, 10000, 10076, 10071
Pioneer	10165, 10011, 10037, 10135, 10163, 10170, 10257, 10351, 10370, 10486, 10612, 10675, 10760, 10866, 11280
Pioneer 10037, 10496, 11556
Plastron 10003, 10037, 10264
Playsonic 10037, 10217, 10214, 10715
Poandis	10.693, 10865, 11226, 11318, 11341, 11483, 11523
Popy 10029
Portland	10451, 10097, 10374
Powerpoint	10037, 10487, 10098
Purdan-Prince	10361
Precision	10236, 10180, 10217
Premier 10009, 10264
Presidian 10850
Prima	10761, 10009, 10264, 10793, 10813, 10817, 11289, 11933
Princusian 10730
Pristun	11037
Prinz	10361
Prism	10256, 10061

Protex 10039, 10163, 10351
Proli	10009
Prolica 11556
Proftronic 10037
Proline	10037, 10173, '1025', 10634, 11337
Proscan 11447, 12047, 11347, 11322
Proacc	10156
Prosonic	10034, 10217, '1034', 10671, 10374, 10568, '1014
Protec 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
Protech	10009, 10037, '10217, 10254, 10418, 10486, '10688, 1'037
Proton	10116, 10035, 10001, 10009
Preview 11458
ProVision	10037, 10556, 10714, 11037
Pulsar	10017, 10042
Pulsar	10178, 10092
Pvision 10876, 11191
Pye	10037, 10374, 10553
Pyri	10009
Cingdao	10054, 10208, '10226, 10294, 10817
Cuadral	10051, 10218
Cuardz	10150, 10218
Cuasar	10253, 10551, '10019, 10035, 10850, 10865
Cualle	10011, 10057, '10070, 10074, 10103, 10195, '10200, 10327, 10361, 10512, '10688, 1'037
Cuesta 10036
Custat 10036
H Line 10037
Habit	10047
Racalys	10163, 10218
Racola	10037, 10217, 10556
Racbanallo	10037
RacloSnack	10047, 10154, '10180, 10150, 10178, 10230, '10037, 11924
Racotone	10003, 10257, '10264, 10370, 10418, 10548, '10688, 1'037
Rank	10070
Rank Arena	10036, 10602
ROM	10070
RCA	11447, 10047, '11654, 10054, 10000, 10051, '10053, 10178, 10033, 10092, '11958, 11953, 11543, 11522, '11917, 11947, 11347, 11247, '1147, 11047, 10879, 10825, '10580, 10080
Reuristic	10047, 10154, '10160, 10150, 10178, 10230
Recai	10037, 10418
Reculigna	10037
Recrusion	10038, 10163, '10346, 10381, 10549
Recinar 10037
Reflex	10037, 10688, 11037
Rollays	10066, 10576, '10877, 11237, 11298

2

Remotec	10250, 10090, 10145, 10171, 10037
Hocus	10714
Hovax 10007
Rex	10163, 10264
RFT	10257, 10264
Rinex	10773
Roadstar	10008, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10418, 10688, 10714, 11037, 11900
Rolson	11371
Rower	10258, 10877
Rowa	10748, 10008, 10037, 10264, 10587, 10690, 10712, 10817
Royal Lux	10335, 10070
Runco	10017, 10000, 10030
Royl	10817
Sada	10250, 10109, 10163, 10267, 10335, 10343, 10361, 10498, 10548, 10560, 10529, 10714
Segon 10435, 10610, 10619
Saige	10009, 10817
Salina	10008, 10011, 10163, 10217, 10264
Salvod	10037, 10068, 10072, 11037, 11163, 11555, 11807
Sakal	10163
Sasyno	10455
Salora	10163, 10208, 10361, 10450, 10548, 10631
Salisa	10359
Sampo	10047, 10154, 10093, 10178, 10000, 10171, 10092, 10009, 10008, 10050, 10000, 11755, 11756
Samsung	10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10156, 10090, 10000, 10012, 10102, 10178, 10030, 10092, 10814, 10766, 10718, 10618, 10587, 10817, 10821, 11030, 11243, 11312, 11803, 11939, 10556, 10571, 10370, 10822, 10225, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10090, 10057, 10036, 10005, 10009
Sandra 10217
Sanlian	10264
Sanky 10062, 10300
Sansui	10463, 10060, 10030, 10036, 10007, 10371, 10455, 10602, 10714, 10861, 11371, 11537, 11904, 11511
Santou 10009
Sanyu	10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10463, 10160, 10445, 10771, 11753, 11208, 10704, 10598, 10370, 10264, 10217, 10208, 10170, 10163, 10108, 10088, 10037, 10039, 10011, 10008
Sanyang	10037
Sanyuan	10093, 10009, 10017
Saville	10060

5BH	10037, 10556
Scootre 11217
Schaub Lorentz	10361, 10374, 10486, 10548, 10636, 10714, 11191
Schneider	11982, 11994, 11937, 11037, 10714, 10668, 10648, 10556, 10334, 10371, 10361, 10382, 10342, 10218, 10277, 10163, 10070, 10037
Scottish	10178
Scotland 12163
Scoll.	10236, 10180, 10178, 10030
Beans	10041, 10094, 10077, 10154, 10008, 10055, 10051, 10093, 10060, 10051, 10078, 10030, 10171, 10168, 10055, 10036, 10007, 10001, 10208, 11304
Sawayor 10634
Sawyer	11037
SEG	10009, 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10362, 10467, 10686, 11037, 11163
Sel-10037, 10163
Sel-Siurnalyne	10237
Selecc	10163, 10264, 10346, 10382, 10371
Senitiva	10180
Serp	10156
Senzura	10009
Sentra	10033
Sonino 10090, 10455, 10610
Shanchu	10264, 10917
Shanghai	10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10817
Shaofeng	10143, 10917
Sharp	10054, 10091, 10180, 10053, 10000, 10008, 10036, 10200, 10650, 10693, 10668, 11153, 11393, 11917
Shan Ying	10092, 10009
Shanchi	10145, 10009, 10254
Shang Chie	10093, 10236, 10009
Shanyeng	10008, 10264, 10817
Shantwood	10009
Shinuzhi	10057
Shinkai	10176, 10037, 10374, 10443, 10556
Shaw 10009, 10418
Sarean 10163
Sargunis	10145, 10037, 10195, 10200, 10327
Sora	10037, 10556
Siasla 10370
Sagnolure	10047, 10093, 10000
Silva	10037, 10061, 10046
Silva Schneider	10037, 11556
Silvano	10087
Silvar	10039, 10361, 10455, 10715
SilvarCrest	11037

Simpson	10739, 10830, 10911
Singer	10860, 10957, 10909, 10937, 10935, 10971, 10432, 11597
Srucc	10773
Shadyne	10837, 10163, 10961
Skavlic	10763
SKY	10837, 10880, 11504
Sky Brazil	10880
Sky North	10837
Skyplant	10780
Skyworth	10748, 10009, 10007, 10264, 10858, 10805, 10812, 11115
Siding	10865, 10860
SLX 10868
Smangrid 10487
Soundtron	10865, 11298
Solar Dress	10000
Solenvox	10037, 10163, 10961, 10548
Sulu	10813
Sonawa	10218
Songba	10000
Sonike	10037
Sonitron	10208, 10217, 10370
Sonneair	10037
Sonoko	10003, 10037, 10217, 10284
Sunior 10193, 10208, 10361, 10548
Sunice 10009, 10037, 10570
Sony	10017, 10154, 11130, 10000, 10150, 10053, 10017, 10032, 10037, 10074, 10553, 10650, 11645, 11651, 11757, 11904
Sound & Vision	10218, 10374
Sounddesign	10180, 10178
Soundhome	10037, 10478, 10715
Sowa	11852
Sowa	10156, 10051, 10050, 10178, 10292, 10036, 10226
Soyee	10773
Soursta	10009
Spectravision	10156, 10178
Spectronic, 11498
Spareview	10171
SR2000	10154, 10171
Ssungyong	10009
SSS	10180
Stalkenny	10009
Standard	10009, 10037, 10217, 10216, 10374, 11037
Standard Components	10009, 10218
Star life	10226, 10180, 10009, 10037, 10163, 10264
Stanway	10218
Stom	10163, 10267
Stovson	11882
Struck	10009, 10037, 10264
Strong 11149, 11163
Studio Experience 10913
Stylandia 10217
Sunkai	10218, 10455, 10457, 10610, 10863
Sunstar 10009, 10037, 10264, 10371
Sunwart 10456
Sunwood 10037
Superia 10217
Superscan 10003, 10664, 11544
Supersonic 10009, 10208, 10455, 10805
SuperTech 10009, 10037, 10218, 10556
Supra 10178, 10009, 10374
Supreme 10000
Susama 10218, 10297, 10335
Sutton 10009
SV2000 10054
SVA	10743, 10567, 10855, 10870, 10871, 10872
Swasa	10455
Swlastan	10880, 11504
Sydney 10217
Sylvania	10054, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10054, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10056, 10037, 10875, 11271, 11904, 11944
Symphonic	10000, 10180, 10178, 10171, 11504, 11844
Synco	10000, 10451, 10053, 10050, 10178, 10052, 10036
Syntax	11144, 11243, 11331
Systine	10037
T-A	10447
Teelco	10178, 10592, 10009
Te Yi	10009
Tethan 10009, 10374, 10817
Tendburg	10109, 10361, 10367
Tendy	10093, 10163, 10217, 10218
Terpa	11371
Tashiko	10092, 10056, 10163, 10170, 10217, 10850
Telung	10054, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10054, 10050, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10009, 10217, 11156, 11191, 11243, 11254, 11371, 11556, 11556
TCL	10708, 10699, 11027, 11537
ICM	10714, 10808
Teac	10154, 10178, 10171, 10135, 11755, 11430, 11037, 10174, 10712, 10858, 10688, 10512, 10455, 10478, 10264, 10217, 10178, 10057, 10009
Tez	10009, 10057, 10163, 10217, 10335
Tech Line 10037, 10668, 11163
Techica	10219
Techlica	11582

Technics	1054, 10290, 10051, 10226
	10568, 10350
TechnixSai	10556, 11297
Technissor 10714
Technosonic	10498, 10556
Technovor 10530, 10217
Technow 10847
Techwood	10250, 10051, 10060, 11183
Techninogen	10556
Iuco	10054, 10293, 10148, 10032
	10009, 10036, 10218, 10254
	10053, 11040
Tedalex	10009, 10208, 10217, 10416
	10008, 10098, 11357
Luton	10009
Lok	10023
Lutinka	10054, 10463, 10180, 10150
	10063, 10178, 10092
Luko Systemi Electronic	10698
Telestav 10297, 10343
Telascator	10017
Telascor	10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10294
	10027, 11004, 10821, 10820, 10819, 10714, 10712, 10688, 10629, 10647, 10660, 10436, 10488, 10346, 10343, 10335, 10287, 10109, 10074, 10073, 10037
Telafurken	10027
	10037
Telafusion	10007, 10163, 10218, 10294
Telograd	10007, 10163, 10218, 10294
Telomaster	10007
Telesanic 10037
Telostar	10009, 10037, 10556
Telatoch	10009, 10037, 10668, 11037
Telaton 10008, 10217
Telavideon	10163
Telaview 10037
Tempest	10009, 10264, 10455
Temnase	10007
Tensai	10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10371, 10374, 10375, 11037
Tensor 12009
Tera	10033, 10092
Texan	10037, 10556, 10648, 10636, 10714, 10808, 11357, 11137, 11243, 11298, 11458, 11556
Texet	10009, 10217, 10218, 10374
Texa	10283
ThamesScene	10887
Thomas	10047, 10179, 10001, 11904
Thomson	11447, 10047, 10057, 10139, 10287, 10335, 10343, 10580, 10623
	10035, 10036, 10037, 10073, 10074, 10109, 10163, 10254, 10333, 10343, 10361, 10439, 10512
Thorn-Ferguson	10007, 10335, 10343, 10499

Tiana	10083, 10317
Tiny	11259
IMK	10236, 10180, 10176
TMI	11/56
TMCI	10017
Tabiishi	10218
Tobo	10/48, 10009, 10364
Tokami 10156
Tokai	10008, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10254, 10363, 11057
Tokaido 11037
Tokyo	10035
Tomashi 10218
Tangguang	10264
Tangtel	10587, 10730
Topline	10658, 11037
Toshiba	10154, 11256, 10156, 10150, 11265, 10060, 11145, 10145, 10166, 11037, 11156, 11163, 11164, 11356, 11508, 11556, 11656, 11704, 11845, 11371, 10845, 10821, 10718, 10650, 10618, 10548, 10644, 10721, 10735, 10109, 10070, 10036, 10085, 10011, 10003
Tatevision	10051
Tawada	10217
Toyoda 10009, 10264, 10371
Toyamaika	10178
Tokuni	10217, 10254
Trans Continens	10037, 10217, 10698, 11037
TRANS-continents	10356, 10685
Transonic	10008, 10037, 10264, 10418, 10495, 10512, 10567, 10698, 10712, 10740
Inad	10218, 10556
Inord	10217
Ina	11498
Instar	10218, 10254
Triumph	10037, 10346, 10568
Trutane	10250, 10061
Turstex 10030, 10052, 10029
TVS	10463
TVTEXT 95	10559
Uber	10037, 10370, 10374, 10418, 10483, 10486
Ultra	10092
Ultravix	10037, 10133, 10374
Unic Line	10037, 10455
United	10037, 10587, 10714, 10715, 11032, 11992
Universal 10047, 10037
Universum	11163, 11037, 10588, 10631, 10618, 10512, 10490, 10418, 10570, 10362, 10361, 10496, 10327, 10264, 10277, 10200, 10195, 10170, 10109, 10074, 10073, 10037, 10036, 10011, 10008

Univox	1037, 1013
V	1064, 1085, 1175, 1175
Vzmax	1065
Vz Videosayer	1080, 1127, 1175
Vector Research	1030
Vestel	1007, 10217, 1068, 11037, 11133
Vexa	1008, 1037
Victor	1026, 1053, 1036, 1050, 1063
Videcon	1050
Videologic 10218
Videologique	10217, 10218
Videomac	1009
VideSystem	1037
Videotechnic	10217, 10374
Videoton	10163
Vidiktor	10054
Viduci	10179, 10039
Vieapia	10875
Vieawsonic	10857, 10864, 1085, 11330, 11548, 11627, 11750
Viking	10060
Vora	11207
Vision	1037, 10217, 10264
Vizic	10884, 10885, 11750, 11756, 11736
Vortac	10037
Vossan	10178, 10037, 10163, 10418
Walham	10007, 10108, 10217, 10418, 10443, 10668, 11037
Wards	10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10236, 10180, 10000, 10178, 10000, 10166, 11347, 11156, 11147, 10868, 10195, 10001, 10007, 10035
Warumala 10374, 10861
Watson	10008, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10334, 10668, 10714, 11037
Watt Radio	10163
Waycon	10159
Waga	10236, 10037
Wagevax 10008
Weijai	10009
Welltech	10114
Walblick	10217
Walton	10178
Wallstar	11037
Westinghouse	10000, 10451, 10865, 10889, 11282, 11577
Whirlsdale	10037, 10556, 10880, 11558
White	10451, 10235, 10463, 10037, 10623, 10889, 11909
Westinghouse	10000, 10688, 11037
Windster 10688, 11037
Winty Semi	10559
Wintel	10714
World	10451, 10236, 10463, 10180

World-of-Vision	10855, 10877, 10883, 11217, 11238
Worldview	10455
X Vice	11191
Xenius	10634, 10661
Xiahua	10005, 10264, 10698, 10773, 10817
Xianghai 10003
Xiangyang 10264
Xionyu	10008
Xinxi	10264, 10617
Xingfu 10009
Xinghai	10264
Xiongic 10698, 10850
Xiozao	11064
Xoro	11198, 11217
XH-1000, 10154, 10180, 10171
Xyipun 10007
Yamaha 10030, 10250, 11576
Yamshi	10037, 10217, 10218, 10455
Yapake	10250
Yingga	10005
Yokan 10037
Yoko	10005, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10393
Yanggu 10009
Yaox	10030, 10218
Yuhaiwasi	10817
Yousida	10020
Yubang 10009
Zanussi 10153, 10217, 10264
Zenith	10047, 10017, 10000, 10093, 10453, 11265, 10612, 10178, 10030, 11145, 10145, 10171, 10092, 10007, 11904, 11909, 11911
ZhuHai	10009, 10074

TV/DVD Combination ※2, ※4
※2
A	Avvent 11933
	Akai 11675
	Akura 11992
	Alba 11037
	Amistrad 11362
	Apox Digital 11943
	Audiovox 11937, 11951, 11952
	Axon 11937, 11958
B	Black Diamond 11037
	Bush 10690, 11037, 11900
C	Centrum 11037
	Crowd 11037
D	D-Vision 11992
	Denver 10567

E	Blank 11037
F	Ferguson 11037
	Hindux 11556
G	Goodmans 10687, 11037, 11900
H	Hitachi 11996
J	JCM 11992
	Jensen 11933
K	KLH 11362
L	Lanco 10587
	Logik 11037
	Luko 11992
	Luxor 11037
M	Matsui 11037
	Maxim 11992
	Medion 11900
	Minor 11900
N	Naiko 11992
	Narita 11992
P	Panasonic 11941
	Philips 11451, 10556, 11961
	Froverpoint 10636
	Prima 11933
R	RCA 11946, 11958
	Roadstar 11900
S	Sawod 11992
	Samsung 11903
	Schneider 11992
	STG 11037
	Soya 11992
	Stavson 11992
	Sylvania 10171
T	Iloc 10598
	Technique 11992
	Telefunken 10698
	Thompson 10625
	Transonic 10587
U	United 10587, 11037, 11992
V	Vestel 11037
※4
A	Akai 30695
	Akura 31367
	Alba 30695, 30684
	Anstrad 31397
B	Apex Digital 30630
	Black Diamond 30713, 30884
	Broksonic 30695
	Bush 30713, 30684
C	Bertram 30713
	Citizen 30695
	Crown 30713
D	D-Vision 31397

	DMTech	31271
E	Elkenk	30713, 30884
	Emerson	30675, 31259
	FSA 31268
F	Ferguson	30695, 30713, 30884
G	Funai 31268
	Goodmans	30713
	Grandin	30713
	Grundig	30639, 30695
H	Hochi 31247
I	Insignie	31258
J	JOY	31367
	JNC	31271
K	Konke 31192
L	Logik 30713, 30884
	Lukar 31367
	Luxor 30713
M	Magravux	31298
	Matsui 30713, 30884
	Maxim 31367
N	Natico 31357
	Narita	31387
	Nexia 31271
O	Orion 30695
P	Pacific 30695
	Panasonic 31490
	Philips	30639, 30884, 31260
R	RCA	31022
S	Salvind	31367
	Samsung	30899
	Sansui	30695
	Szernedor	31397
	SEB 30713, 30884
	Sliding	31115
	Stuckson	31397
	Sylvania	30630, 30675, 31268
T	Technica	31387
	Thomson 30651
	Toshiba 30695
U	United 30713, 30884, 21387
	Universum	30713
V	Vestel 30684

	Bricksonic	10463, 11911
	Bush	11556
CDEF	Curie Mathos	10051
	Dawson 11908
	Emerson	10236, 10463, 11909, 11911
	Tengson 100/3, 1082%
	Fidelity	101/1
	Funai 11904
G	GE	10047, 10051, 10093, 11917, 11927
	GoldStar	10037
	Goodmans 10074, 11908
	Grundig	10037, 10195, 10656
H	Harley Davidson	11904
	Hiner	10036
	Hitachi 11904
I	Internal 11908
J	JVC	11923
L	LG	10178
	Lloyd's	11904
M	Magnavcs	10054, 11904
	Memorax	10260
	Mitsubishi 10083, 10656, 11917
O	Orion 10483, 11911
P	Palsonic 11904
	Parasomic	10250, 10051
	Porney	10051
	Phillips	10057, 10656
	Ouasar 10250, 10951
Q	Radica	10556
	RadioShack	11904
	RCA	10047, 10051, 10093, 11917, 11922
S	Saba	10825
	Samsung	11909
	Sansui	10463, 11904, 11911
	Schneider	10057, 10056, 11904
	Sears	11904
	Shara 10093, 11917
	Siemens	10037
	Sony	10000, 11905, 11904
	Sylvania	10054
	Synchronic	11904
T	Teac	101/8, 10171
	Technics	10656
	Thomas	11904
	Thompson 13025
	Ioshiba 11971
W	White	11908
	Washinghouse
Z	Zenith 11904, 11908, 11911
※3
A	Alkai	20000, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21137

Akai	20352
Alba	20352
Aronica Action	20278
Amstrad 20000
AudioVax	20278
Beko	21104
Bestar 20278
Blue Sky	20278, 20352, 20442
BPI	20246
Brotonic	20002, 20479, 21479
Bush	20352, 20742
Citizen	20278, 21278
Curtis Mathes	20353, 21035
Daewoo 20278, 20637, 21278
Dantax 20352
Einstein	20002, 20279, 20479, 20637, 21278, 21479
Ferguson 20000, 20278
Fidelity 20000
Firstline	20278
Fushi 20000
GE	20061, 20035, 20048, 20210, 20812, 21035, 21660
GoldStar	20037, 20480, 21237
Goodmans	20278, 20352, 20637
Giantin	20278, 20742
Giantig	20081, 20347, 20352, 20742
Hannex	20352
Harley Davidson	20000
Hirani 20352
Hitachi 20000
Hypon	20357
Itunreal 20278, 20637
JBL	20278
JMB 20352
Kambrook	20037
Knissal	20278, 20352
LG	20357, 20480, 21237
Lloyd's	20000
Loave	20357
Magnasonic	20278, 21278
Magnovox	20081, 20000, 21791
Magnin 20243
Matsui 20352, 21442
Medion 20352
Monerux	20162, 20037, 21162, 21237, 21262
MCA 20240
Microsoft 20048, 20091, 20043, 20807
Oporus	20162, 21162, 21262
Union	20002, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21479
Pace 20352
Pacific 20742

Fasonic 20000
Panasonic	20035, 20167, 21038, 21167, 21262
Fonney	20035, 20037, 20240, 21035, 21237
Philips	20081
Portland	20637
Quasar 20035, 20162, 21035, 21162
Radiola	20081
RadioShack	20000
RCA	20260, 20035, 20043, 20240, 20807, 21035, 21060
Sabs	20320
Samsung	20740, 20437, 21014
Samsung	20000, 20479, 21079
Sanyo	20240
Saville	20352
Schneider	20081, 20000
Soars	20037, 20000, 21237
SEG 20037
Sharp 20037, 20048, 20837
Shivaki	20037
Siemens	20081
Smudyna	20352
Sony	20032, 20000, 21232
Supra 20549
Sylvania	20081, 21/81
Symphonic	20003
Tatung	20352
Texc	20037, 20000, 20637, 20642
Technics	20081
Jechnosonic	20352
Jelalunkon	20279
Thomson	20000
Thomson 20279
Tochita 20357, 20432, 20845, 21145
United 20742
WhiteWesthouse	20278, 20637
Zenith	20000, 20479, 20637, 21/79
Thomson 30561
TV/VCR/DVD Combination
	※2, ※3, ※4
※2
Akai	11903
Broksonic	11938
Emerson	11944
LSA	11944
Magnevox	11944
Panasonic 11943, 11947
RCA	11953

s

Sharp 11917

Svanie 1194

Symphonic 1194

T

Toshiba 11945

※3

S Sharp 20807

※4

A Akai 30899

F Emerson 30821

ESA J0821

M Magranox 30621

P Panasonic 31362, 31462

B BCA 31132

S Sharp 30630

Superscan 30821

Svanie 30821

Symphonic 30821

T Toshiba 31045

VCR

A-Mark	20037, 20240, 20000, 20278, 20045
ABS 21972
Admiral	20060, 20048, 20039, 20047, 20104, 20121, 20209, 20478
Adventure 20037, 20240, 20000
Año 20278
Año	20278, 20048, 20642
Añoa	20037, 20032, 20000, 20278, 20041, 20048, 20052, 20478, 20742, 21137
Akai	20037, 20240, 20041, 20105, 20115, 20148, 20052, 20642
Akura 20041
Aba	20081, 20000, 20029, 20078, 20315, 20348, 20352
Aonware	21972
Alugro	20039, 21137
Alargan 20248
Allstar	20061
America Action	20278
American High	20035, 20081
Américson 20479
Amistrad 20000, 20279
Anan	20162, 20037, 20240, 20078, 20223, 20480
Anan National	20162, 20026, 21182, 21562
Ansonic	20000
Aristone 20081
ASA 20007, 20081
Asha 20240
Asta	20035, 20240
Asaka	20037, 20081, 20000, 20038

Audioab	20081
Audioconic	20278
Audiovox	20357, 20278, 20038
Avis	20000
AVF	20000, 20352
Avia	20037, 20043, 20276, 20642
Baird	20000, 20104, 20041, 20278, 20343, 20106
Basic Line 20104, 20278, 20046
Beaumark	20240
Baks	20104
Bell & Howell	20038, 20048, 20039, 20030, 20101, 20046, 20179
Bestar	20278
Black Diamond	20642
Black Panther	20278
Blaupunki	20162, 20081, 20226
Blue Sky	20357, 20209, 20278, 20048, 20252, 20180, 20842, 20742, 21137
BFI	20346
Branch	20341, 20320
Branch Electronique	20341
Brinkmann	20203, 20348
Broksonic	20184, 20171, 20209, 20037, 20348, 20479, 21479
Bush	20181, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20313, 20348, 20352, 20642, 20147
Cable	20337
Candle	20337, 20338
Caron	20335
Caphart	20202
Carana	20381, 20209
Carrefour	20345
Carrara	20240
Carver	20335, 20081
Casic	20000
Cutley	20278
CCF	20248
CGF	20000, 20041
Changhong	20348, 20081
Cimline	20200
Cineral 20278
Cinovision	21157
Citizen	20383, 20257, 20240, 20030, 20209, 20278, 20479, 21278
Classic 20037
Clartric	20200, 21593
Calcyne 20060, 20355, 20049, 20278
Cut	20000
Combiach	20352
Cundor	20278
Craig	20037, 20047, 20240

Criterion 20000

Crosley	20035, 20081, 23000
Crown	20037, 20278, 23480
Curis Mathes	20080, 20086, 20162, 20240, 20000, 20041, 20278, 20452, 21035
Cybermax	20240
CyberPower	21972
Cyrus	20081
Daewoo	20037, 20085, 20104, 20200, 20278, 20045, 20352, 20657, 20642, 21137, 21278
Dansai	20278
Darlesa	20352
Dayton	20037, 20278
Do Grand	20048, 20081, 20047, 20104, 20046
Docca	20081, 20000, 20067, 20209, 20041, 20352
Dagrafi 20048, 20081, 20072, 23104
Daluran	20278
Dell	21972
Daron	20081, 20042
Darwent 20041
Diamant 20037
Diamond	20348
Digitor	20645
DirecTV 20739
Domland	20238
DSE	20042
Dus	20081, 20000, 20041, 20278, 20318
Dumont 20081, 20000, 20104
Duraband 20039, 20038, 20642
Dynatich	20240, 20000
Elbe	20278, 20038
Electrovona	20080, 20087, 20243, 20000, 20045, 20298
Electrophonic	20037
Flin 20240
Ella 20278
Emerald	20184, 20121
Finerex	20037
Finerson	20035, 20037, 20184, 20039, 20740, 20045, 20000, 20121, 20045, 20208, 20000, 20278, 20348, 20479, 20637, 21278, 21429, 21583
ESA 21137
LSC	20240, 20278
EuroLine	21583
Terguson	20000, 20041, 20278, 20320, 20348
Fidelity	20240, 20000, 20252, 20452
Finlandia	20037, 20048, 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20043, 20046, 20106, 20226

Hirilux 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104

Firstline	20037, 20045, 20042, 20041, 20020, 20026, 20048, 20049, 21137
Fisher	20039, 20047, 20001, 20104, 20016
First 20039, 20048
Fuji	20035, 20033
Fujitsu	20037, 20045, 20000
Tujitsu General	20037
Trunai	20037, 20000, 20278, 21593
Galaxi	20030
Galaxis	20018
Garrard 20000
Gateway	21902
GE	20000, 20005, 20048, 20240, 20000, 20026, 20026, 20007, 21335, 21090
GEC	20091
Garmin 20060
General	20045
General Technic	20348
Genexxa 20037, 20000, 20104, 20278
Ge Viduc 20240, 20432, 20914, 21137
GoldStar	20035, 20037, 20038, 20001, 20029, 20026, 20038, 20225, 20236, 20490, 21137, 21237
Goodmans	20037, 20041, 20240, 20000, 20020, 20026, 20348, 20359, 20537, 20642, 20742
GFK	20037
Gradienta	20030
Graer	20240, 20104, 20041
Graneda	20035, 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20016, 20226
Brandin	20037, 20000, 20208, 20278, 20742
Brundig	20081, 20226, 20325, 20347, 20348, 20352, 20742
Heaz	20318
Hannimox	20352
Hansatid	20037, 20081, 20209, 20338
Hanjie	20740
Harley Davidson	20030
Hamman/Karion	20081, 20038
Headquarter	20046
Howlett Packard	21972
Hill's 20035, 20047, 20000
Hirari	20240, 20209, 20041, 20278, 20052
Hisawa 20209, 2035
Hischiko	20045
Hitachi	20035, 20037, 20081, 20240, 20045, 20006, 20042, 20061, 20016, 20099
Hoeher	20278, 20642
Hormophon	20081
Howard Computers	21972
HP	21932

Hogus Network Systems	20042, 20739
Hohax 20738
Hosh 21972
Hypan	20037, 20000, 20205, 20275, 20052, 20180
Hytek	20047, 20000
iBUYPOWER	21372
Imperial	20000
Impersic	20240, 20209
Interbay	20037
Interfunk	20061, 20104
Intersal 20278, 20637
International	20037, 20278, 20642
Intravison	20037, 20000, 20205, 20275, 20194
Iredic	20037, 20091, 21137
III	20240, 20154, 20041, 20048, 20106
III Nokia 20240, 20104, 20041, 20106
ITV	20037, 20278
Janaill	20240
JBL	20278
Jensen	20057, 20041
JMS	20259, 20348, 20352, 20742
Joyce	20000
JVC	20184, 20081, 20045, 20067, 20041, 21162
Kambrook	20037
Karchar 20081, 20278, 20642
KEC	20037, 20278
Kimco	20057, 20269, 20278, 20106, 20015, 20348, 20642
Kimwood	20087, 20041, 20038, 20048
KIC	20000
Kimari	20047
Kneissal	20037, 20269, 20278, 20348, 20352
Kodek	20035, 20037
Kolin	20043, 20041
Kolaster	20259
KTV	20000
Kuba	20047
Kuba Electronic	20047
Lance 20278
LG	20057, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20269, 20278, 20038, 20225, 20180, 21137, 21237
Lifelix	20209, 20348
Linkya	21972
Lloyd's	20240, 20000, 20038
Lozovo	21062, 20162, 20037, 20091, 21262, 21562
Logik	20240, 20000, 20208, 20105
Lunrolon	20278, 21137
Lunatran	21137

Luxor	20369, 20367, 20364, 20363, 20365, 20366, 20366
LX: 20037, 20000, 20062, 20067
M Electronic 20337, 20240, 20000, 20098
Magradyne 20381
Magrasonic	20367, 20240, 20000, 20278, 21278
Magnox	20393, 20357, 20048, 20039, 20381, 20240, 20000, 20278, 203618, 203642, 213553, 21781
Magnin 20240
Magnin 20642
Manesth 20381, 20345, 20209
Marantu 20335, 20091, 20238, 20098
Mark 20000, 20278
Marix 20037
Music 20642
Musio* 20278
Matsui	20337, 20240, 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20742
Matsushita	20335, 20162, 20091, 20228, 21162
Media Center PC 21972
Mediator 20381
Medion 20209, 20348, 20352, 20642
MTI 20035
Memnerx	20365, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20369, 20347, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20209, 20278, 20048, 20348, 203470, 211652, 21237, 21262
Metronis	20381
Metz	21062, 20162, 20037, 20081, 21278, 20347, 20366, 21162, 21262, 21562
MGA 20060, 20240, 20043
MGN Technology	20240
M'cormay	20348
Micromaxx	20209
Microsoft	21972
Midland 20240
Migras	20300
Mind 21972
Minda	20342
Mitsubishi	20360, 20048, 20047, 20081, 20300, 20342, 20058, 20043, 20341, 20480, 20642, 20837
Motrola 20393, 20048
MTG	20240, 20000
MTX	20300
Multitus	20337
Multitech	20339, 20000
Murphy 20000
Myriad 20081
NAD	20240, 20104
Nuke	20348, 20542
NAP	20339

National 20226

Nebula Electronics	2033
NEC	2035, 2037, 2048, 2013, 20367, 2041, 20278, 20038, 2137
Neckmann 20381, 20341
Nesta	2000
Neufunk	20209
Newarko 2037
Nikkai	20278
Nikko	20357, 20278
Niklodo	20337, 20278
Nishi 20240
Niveus Media	21972
Noblex	20340
Nokia	20348, 20361, 20240, 20042, 20104, 20241, 20278, 20046, 20106, 20315
Northmore	20367, 20341, 20320
Northgate	21872
Nu-Tec	20235
Oceanic	20349, 20361, 20000, 20134, 20341, 20436, 20106
Okang	20209, 20278, 20315, 20378
Cygnos 2035s, 20162, 20104, 20278
Cyinox 20647
Cyigno 20222
Cyminus	21062, 20355, 20162, 20037, 20348, 20347, 20240, 20030, 203104, 20452, 21162, 21282
Criori	20348, 20240, 20000, 20134, 203721, 20209, 20002, 20278, 20349, 20352, 20479, 20742, 21473
Cresn	20000
Caselo 20037, 20000
Clake	20209
Cita Varsano	20381
Pace	20352
Pacific	20300, 20348, 20642, 20772
Packard Bell	21972
Palladium	20357, 20209, 20041, 20378
Palsonic 20300, 20642
Panama 2035s
Panasonic	21062, 20355, 20162, 20030, 20225, 20226, 20514, 20616, 20338, 21355, 21162, 21282, 21662
Patthe Cinema	20543
Pattha Macconi	20341
Penney	20305, 20162, 20037, 20047, 20381, 20240, 20000, 20042, 20362, 20358, 21335, 21237
Portux	20342
Portio	20000, 20209
Philco	20305, 20381, 20000, 20235, 20338, 20226, 20479

Philips	20035, 20152, 20049, 20081, 20045, 20000, 20203, 20226, 20516, 20618, 20738, 21081, 21181
Phoenix	20278
Phonda 20031
Pilot	20037
Pioneer	20152, 20081, 20042, 20067
Polk Audio	20081
Portland 20278, 20287
Presidian 21u53
Prin'	20000
Proftronic	20081, 20240
Proline 20000, 20278, 20320, 20342
Proscan	20050, 21060
Proscor	20278
Prosymic	20239, 20278
Protoc	20000
Protech	20081
ProVision	20278
Pulsar 20039, 20240, 20278
Pulsar 20240
Pya	20081, 20000
Disheng	20060
Quarter 20046
Quartz	20035, 20047, 20048
Quasar	20035, 20152, 20002, 20279, 20226, 21035, 21162
Quelle	20081
Radiva ve 20037, 20049, 20381
Radiva	20081
Radionette	20037, 21137
RadixShack	20035, 20152, 20037, 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20046, 21152
Radix	20037
Hambus	20037
Rank	20041
Rank Arena	20041
RCA	20080, 20035, 20049, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20047, 20106, 20226, 20320, 20807, 20880, 21035, 21060
Realistic	20035, 20152, 20037, 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20121, 20248, 20048, 21162
Hocs	20348
HockeyTV	20614, 20616
Hex	20041
Ricaviation	21972
Rio	21137
Roadstar	20037, 20081, 20240, 20279, 20038, 20742
Runco	20039
Salva	20041, 20278, 20320
Saliva	20209, 20348
Salora	20104, 20043, 20048, 20106

Sampo	20037, 20048
Samsung	20030, 20046, 20045, 20000, 20038, 20032, 20738, 21014
Suniron	20210
Sanky	20048, 20058
Sansel	20048
Sansui	20240, 20000, 20067, 20208, 20041, 20002, 20108, 20548, 20019, 21479
	20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, 20057, 20208, 20049, 20048, 20479, 21137
Sanyo	20210, 20278, 20252
Saville	20091
SBI	20091
ScanSonic	20240
Schaub-Lorung	20000, 20134, 20041, 21105, 20015, 20318
Schneider	20037, 20087, 20240, 20000, 20042, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20642, 21137
Scot. 20184, 20095	20121, 20043
Sears	20050, 20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20038, 20047, 20033, 20045, 20050, 20042, 20104, 20052, 20043, 20205, 20041, 21237, 20046
Seaway	20278
SEB	20081, 20240, 20278, 20637, 20542
SEI	20081
Sun Smurzyro 20081
Selcco	20037, 20041
Semp	20045
Seatra	20278
Sharp	20037, 20048, 20047, 20032, 20000, 20299, 20037
Shincc	20000
Shimori 20099, 20210, 20000, 21104
Shivaki	20037
Shugun	20240
Siemens	20037, 20081, 20104, 20045, 20320, 20347
Siara	20081
Signature	20050, 20035, 20037, 20048, 20030, 20046, 20479
Silva	20037
Silver	20278
SilverCrest	20642
Singer	20037, 20240, 20045, 20348
Shuynne	20081, 20208, 20252
Smaragd 20348
Sonic Blue	20014, 20016, 21137
Sonokrache	20046
Sonior 20099, 20048
Sonica 20037, 20278
Sonwa 20042
Sony	20035, 20048, 20047, 20032, 20033, 20000, 20067, 20045, 20106, 20226, 20638, 21237, 21372

Soundmaster	20000
Soundwave	20037, 20208, 20349
Sluck 9	21972
Standard	20218
Stem	20218
STS 20042
Sunkai	20219, 20216, 20348
Sunstar 20000
Suntronic 20000
Supra	20037, 20278, 20349
Susumu 20037
SV2300, 20000
SVA	20000
Sylvania	20035, 20081, 20000, 20043, 21953, 21781
Symthonic	20240, 20000, 20002, 21593
Systemax	21972
I+A 20182
Japan Systems	21972
Taisha	20200
Tandberg	20278
Tandy	20000, 20104
Tashiko	20037, 20048, 20081, 20240, 20000
Tarung	20048, 20081, 20045, 20000, 20067, 20043, 20039, 20041, 20349, 20352
Tashibo	20348
ICM	20348
Teac	20037, 20000, 20067, 20041, 20278, 20537, 20642, 21593
Technics	20035, 20162, 20037, 20081, 20000, 20226, 21192
TechniSat 20348
Technosonic	20352
Teco	20035, 20037, 20048, 20041, 20058
Tokotox	20037, 20239, 20348, 20342
Tokoka	20035, 20037, 20000
Teleavia	20041
Telecorder	20243
Telefunken	20269, 20041, 20278, 20320, 20842
Telentar	20278
Telestar	20037
Telotoch 20000, 20278
Tensai	20037, 20000, 20278
Textron	20209, 20348, 20478, 20342
Texet	20278
Thomas	20030, 20032
Thompson	20000, 20067, 20041, 20278, 20320
Thorn	20037, 20134, 20041, 20320
Isomic 20278
Ivo	20618, 20536, 20738, 21996
TMX	20240, 20000
TINX 2037
Iocon 20240
Tokai 20037, 20194, 20241
Topline 20348
	20381, 20340, 20045, 20010, 20042, 20067, 20045, 20219, 20341, 20352, 20432, 20442, 20343, 21308, 21145, 21372, 21595
Toshiba
Toosnic 20278
Television 20357, 20240
Touch 21972
Toyoda 20278
Iraoux 20091
Irrid 20278
Irix 20337
Ulton 20240
Ultra 20045, 20278
Ultravox 20278
Unitech 20240
United 20348, 20742, 21583
Universum	20337, 20381, 20240, 20010, 20105, 20209, 20156, 20348, 21137
Vactor	20345
Vactor Research	20184, 20338
Victor 20067, 20241
Video Concepts	20345
Video Technic	20050
Videoconic	20037
Videosonic	20240, 20010
Viewsonic	21372
Villain	20000
Voodoo	21972
Wards	20060, 20035, 20037, 20048, 20338, 20047, 20081, 20033, 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, 20043, 20041, 20038, 20048, 20479
Watson	20081, 20052, 20642
Weiblick	20037
Wharafcale	20842
White	20000, 20209, 20278, 20478, 20352
Westinghouse
World	20209, 20002, 20348, 25478
XR 1000	20055, 20240, 20010
Yamsha	20047, 20038
Yamshi	20278
Yaka 20357, 20240
Zenith	20337, 20339, 20033, 20000, 20104, 20341, 20278, 20478, 20357, 21137, 21479
ZT Group	21972
ZX	20709, 20348, 20352

PVR※3

A	ABS	21572
	Airworks	21572
C	CyberPower	21572
D	Cell	21572
	DreecTV 20138
G	Gateway	21572
	Go Video	20614
H	Howlett Packard	21572
	Howert Computers	21572
	HP	21572
	Hughes Network Systems	20738
	Illumax	20739
	Hush	21572
I	IBUYPOWER	21572
L	Linksys 21572
M	Media Camer PC	21572
	Microsoft	21572
	Mind 21572
N	Niveus Media	21572
	Northgate	21572
P	Panasonic	20614, 20616
	Philips	20618, 20739
R	HCA 20880
	HippsonTV	20614, 20616
S	Samsung	20739
	Sonic Blue	20614, 20616
	Sony 20638, 21572
	Stuck 9	21572
T	Systemex	21572
	Tagar Systems	21572
	Tivo	20618, 20638, 20739
	Toshiba	21008, 21572, 21956
	Touch 21972
V	Viewsonic	21572
	Voodoo	21572
Z	ZT Group	21572

DVD Player

1	3D IAR	30a63, 30a39
	4Kus 31158
A	A Trend 30714
	Acoustic Solutions	30713, 30730, 31228
	ACG 30770, 30768, 30790, 31923
	AK	31051, 31152, 31923
	Am	30672, 30689, 30873
	Am	30672, 31006, 31224, 31250, 31321, 31345

Ama 30533, 30541

Akai	30680, 30695, 30705, 30770, 30758, 30790, 30884, 30898, 30859, 31115, 31205, 31233, 31985
Akashii	30838
AKI 31005
Akira 30589, 31321
Akura	30886, 31051, 31140, 31293, 31367
Albo	30672, 30688, 30717, 30805, 30659, 30713, 30741, 30783, 30884, 31140, 31532, 31695
Alco	30790
Alco 31151
All-Tel	31451
Allegra 30889
Altacom 31224
Antech 30794, 30770, 30850
Annoi 30882
Amphion Media Wars	30872
Anstrad	30/13, 30/70, 31151, 31367
AMW	30872
Anam 31913
Ansonic	30759, 30774, 30831
Apex Digital	30535, 30672, 30717, 30755, 30784, 30796, 30797, 30850, 31054, 31060, 31068, 31061
Aristona	30539, 30648
Ango	31023
ASCOMTTC	31923
Asano	31224
Asaini Digital	31198
Altacom 31224
Autosonic	30680, 31923
Autogex	30717, 30790
Aucoworld	30790
Autovex 30713
Aunic	30843
Awa	30730, 30872
Axlan	30793
Base 31451
Basic Line	30713
Baze 30898
BOK 30862, 31224
Beep	31183
Bellagia 31004
Bulson	31086, 31923
Binatono 31923
Black Diamond	30713, 30833, 30884
Bluepunkt	30717
Blursans	31233, 31321
Blue Nova International	31321
Blue Parade	30571

Blue Sky	30672, 30651, 30695, 30698, 30713, 30730, 30843, 31423
Boglu	31024
Bomran	30793, 30898, 31005
Bose 32023
Braunwave	30770, 31115
Brandt	30523, 30631, 32051
Broksonic	30695
Bush	30672, 30712, 30690, 30693, 30713, 30723, 30730, 30831, 30833, 30894, 31051, 31143, 31493, 31695, 31832
Byd signi	30972
C Tech	31798, 31152
California Audio Labs	30190
Cambridge Audio	30751, 31109
Cambridge Soundworks	30690
Comporatic Digital	31051
Cat	30659, 30785, 31421, 31523
DCE	30730
Celestial	31020
celte 31730
Centrex 30672, 31004
Centrum	30713, 30789, 31005, 31227, 31923
CGV	30713, 31115
Changdong	30627, 31061
Cinca	30631, 30841
Credice	30713, 30872
cndULTRA 30689
CineVision	30633, 30689, 31483
Citizen	30695
Cairtone	30571
Classic 30730, 31783
Datronic	30672, 30675, 30788, 31233
Dayton	30713
Doby	30750, 30852, 31088, 31321, 31923
Codex	31733
Compress	31321
Conia	30672, 30862, 31321
Contel	30758
Continental Edison	30831, 30872
Craig 30831
Creative 30623, 30539
Crown	30680, 30713, 30793, 31115
Crypto 31729
Curis Mathes	31087
Cybercom	30831
Cyberlane	30714, 30816, 30874, 31023, 31324, 31117, 31125, 31502
Cyrum 30851, 30705, 30774, 31347
DA-Vision	31115, 31367
Duvox	30972

Deawoo	30950, 30764, 30725, 30714, 30770, 30833, 30859, 30872, 31172, 31483, 31905
Daiton 31356
Dansai	30770, 30753, 31115, 31695
Dantax 30638, 30713, 30723, 30750
Dayak	30972, 31005
Dayton 30872
OCE 30831
Decca	30770, 31115
Denon	30950, 30634, 31634 (32134)*
Denver	30672, 30659, 30798, 30898, 31246, 31164, 31321, 31923
Deluzal	30655
Delay	30943, 31212
Delac	30972
Diamond	30951, 30751, 30768, 30790
Digitong	30713
Digitlogic	30713
digRED	30717
Digitech 31832
Digitor	30851, 30650, 30833, 31005, 31423
Digitex 30872, 31104, 31056
DK 30831
Dinamic 30788
Disney	30675, 30831, 31770
DIViOs	30725
DK Digital 30831
DMTech 30780, 31271
Dragon	30831
DreamX 31151
DSE 30833, 31152, 31790
Dual	30851, 30665, 30675, 30713, 30730, 30763, 30790, 30831, 31023
Durabrand	30713, 30831, 31023, 31502
DVD2700	30521
DVX 30768
Emax	31233, 31321
FagiaTec 30714
aBench	31152
ECC	30730
Eclipse 30723, 30751
Elunk	30713, 30850, 30894
Elin	30770
Elite	31152
Ellion	30850, 31421
Elta	30872, 30650, 30770, 30798, 30850, 31051, 31115, 31151, 31233
Elrax 31233, 31321
Emerson	30991, 30675, 30705, 30821, 31268
Enterprise	30951
Enrico 30500, 30539
Enzar 20784, 30770, 31229
ESA 30821, 31269
Ford line 30575, 30768, 31115, 31233
Fernar 30651
Farguson	30851, 30895, 30713, 30894, 30894, 31595, 31730
Fintus	30872, 30951, 30741, 30751, 3170, 30783
Fording	30851, 30713, 30843, 30865, 31530
Fisher 30670
Fural 30675, 30695, 31268
Fusion 30682
Gateway 31159
GE 30622, 30815, 31717
General Electric 30717
Genmaeus 31051
Global Link 31224
Global Solutions 30769
Global Sphere 31152
Go Video	30573, 30744, 30717, 30715, 30741, 30783, 30835, 30855, 31545, 31575, 31595, 31158, 31483, 31730
GoldStar 30x31, 30741, 31860
Goodmets	30851, 30890, 30713, 30729, 30730, 30783, 30750, 30833, 31006, 31140, 31425, 31530, 31730, 31920
GP Audio 31140
GPX 30600, 30741
Gradione 33490, 30851
Grundz 30665
Gran Prox	30851, 30958
Grundin	30713, 31233
Greenhill 30717
Grundig	30539, 30951, 30551, 30670, 30888, 30956, 30755, 30713, 30773, 30790, 31004, 31035, 31695, 31730, 31932, 31920
Grunvel	30740, 30750, 30831
H & B	30713, 30841, 30850, 31293, 31421
Haaz	30751, 31152
Haier 30843
Hanesatic	30741, 30763, 30780
Hammer/Gardar 32587, 30702
HCM	30768
HOT	30705
HC	30750, 31153, 31923
Henss 30713
H MAX	30843
Hlachi	30573, 30864, 30655, 30713, 31247, 31520
Hlicker	30872, 31923
Hochor	30851, 30713, 30831, 31004, 31222

Home Electronics	30730, 30770
Home Tech Industries	31224
Hoco	30865
Humax	30546
Hyundai	30783, 30850, 31051, 31228
Ile	31349
Ingelen	30198
Ingarsal	31023
Initial	30853, 30717
Inna Hit	30713
Insignia	31268
Inbopa	30571, 30627, 31634
Inradio	30663, 31115, 31224, 31233
IRT	30783
ISP	30895
Jame	31039
Jaluri	30855
JBL	30702
JOE 30/30
JOY	31367
Jeven 30&59
Jeppen	31250
JMB	30895
JNC	30872, 31271
JSI	31423
JVC	30803, 30539, 30658, 30673, 30867, 31164, 31597, 31850
JWin	31051
Kansas Technologies	31253, 31330
Kanzner	30783
Kawasaki	30790
Kondo	30872, 30899, 30713, 30831
Karros	30713, 30770, 30888
Karwood 30&30, 30534
Kilim	30770
Kiss	30863, 30841, 31523
KLH	30815, 30717, 30790, 31020
Kloss 30&33
Koda	31250
Kurka 31192
Kiss	30851, 31061, 31423
Kreisen	31421
KXD	31321, 31423
Lasaric	30877, 30758, 30789
Lawson	30768
L acquisition	31533
Lukker	30872
Lanco	30851, 30899, 30713, 30770, 30774
Lanoir 31228
Lanoox	30890, 30838
Ledia	30899, 30788

LG	30581, 30741, 30790, 30868, 31206
Lululex	30651, 30831, 31347
Limit	30798, 31104
LiteOn	31058, 31156
Lodas 30/13
Loave	30539, 30511, 30741, 30885
Logik	30713, 30884
Logix	30705, 30793
Luder 31567
Lunarton	30695, 30705, 30713, 30741, 30833, 31105, 31521, 31632
Lunarton	30741
Luman	30573
Luder 30/13, 31004, 31895, 31730
Magnasonic	30651, 30675
Magnus	31923
Magnavox	30513, 30509, 30643, 30675, 30713, 30821, 30885, 31140, 31288
Magnex	30723
Majestic	31345
Manhattan 30705, 30713
Mareniz	30523, 30538, 30675
Mark	30713
Marquent 30770
Marsui	30672, 30651, 30695, 30713, 30864, 31004, 31695, 31730
Maxdorf 30788
Maxont	31347
Maxim	30713, 30872, 31367
Maya	31345
MBO	30680, 30730, 31730
McInsub 31533
MDS	30713
Macrosk	30770
Medion	30651, 30630, 30774, 30783, 30831, 31006, 31720, 31845, 31347, 31423
MFI	30730
Memorex	30630, 30695, 30831, 31270
Metronic	30630
Metz	30575, 30571, 30713
MiCO	30723, 30751, 31223
Micromaxo 31895
Micromedia	30523, 30538
Micramega	30539, 31005
Microsoft	30527, 31708
Microstar	30831
Mirato	30752
Mirax	30713
Mirerva	30735
Minola	30770, 31115
Mirusk	30839, 30717
Mirror	30752

Mitsubishi	31521, 30521, 30713, 31403
Mizada	30770, 31451
Monosia	30685
MPX	30843
Mussek	30730, 31730
Mix Canada 30851, 30751, 31723
Mystrai	30831
NAVI 30741
Naiko 30770, 31004, 31367
Narita	31367
NEC	30741, 30869, 31404
Novate	31271
Nesa	30717
Neufunk	30685
Navir 30770, 30831, 31197
NeoviTech	31402
Nikai	31923
Nintura	31051, 31202
Niro	32024
Norocent	30872, 31923
Nordnende	30744, 30831
Noriko	30762
Nova	31925
Nova 30843
Nu Iloc	31229
Okano	30752
Ollipta	30672
Omni	30890, 30893, 30898, 30862, 31104, 31802
Onix	30838
Dinkyo 30503, 30527
Dopla	31158
Uppo	31224
Upuni	30843
Dipimus	30525, 30571
Drink	30872
Otor 30895, 31233, 31859
Othron	30651
Diamond	30713
P&B	31451
Pacific	30665, 30713, 30749, 30768, 30760, 30831
Packard Bell	30931
Paladium 30895, 30713, 31908, 31920
Palsonic	30672, 30852, 31056, 31321
Panasonic	30503, 30490, 30571, 30703, 31382, 31452, 31490, 31578, 31762, 31834, 31905, 31909
Panda 30717, 30769, 31203
peeCran	30898, 31224
Philco	30650, 30892
Philips	30503, 30539, 30645, 30675, 30854, 30885, 31158, 31262, 31267, 31340, 31354

Phi o	31345
Phoncursand	30699
PianroDisc 31024
Pionzor	30490, 30525, 30571, 30631, 31865
Plu2	30850
Printer	30754
Polaroid	31320, 31051, 31088
Polk Audio	30539
Portland	30770
Powerpoint	30972, 31005
Prusiden 30575
Primo	31228
Prinz	30831
Prisma	30725, 30831
Pro2	31345
ProCastar	31004
Prozvod	30672
Proline	30872, 30851, 30696, 30833, 31004, 31183
Proscan	30522
Prasan 30713
Prosonic 30695, 30752
ProVision	30899, 30730, 31163, 31371, 31523
Pye	30539, 30648
DONIX 31051
Ovestar	30651
Radioenera	30741, 30869, 31008, 32024
RadioShack	30671
Raita	30665
RCA	30522, 30571, 30717, 30790, 30622, 31022, 31132, 31768, 31913, 31965
Realistic	30571
FEC	30450
Radstar	30759, 30763, 30770, 30798, 30898, 31345, 31923
Relways	31347
Rusc	30752, 30798
Revoy 30699, 30841
Rex	30838
Richmond	31233
Rio	30889
Roadstar	30672, 30690, 30699, 30713, 30750, 30833, 30838, 31051, 31227
Rossonic	30669
Ronin	30612
Rotol	30558, 30623
Rowa	30717, 30759, 30872, 31004
Rowsonic	30769
Subo	30651, 3055
Saltaki	30758
Salwood 30759, 30831, 31367
Salore 30741
Sarpo 30752, 31321, 31347
Samsung	30490, 30573, 30744, 30195, 30820, 30899, 31044, 31075, 31055, 31052
Sarsus	30784, 30955, 30751, 30793, 30768, 31051, 31226, 31230, 31095, 31052
Sanyo	30870, 30875, 30855, 30713, 30873, 31228
Scan 30/6s, 30850
ScanMagic 30730, 31750
ScanSonic 31095
Schoub Lorenz 30770, 30789, 31115, 31151
Schneider	30539, 30646, 30651, 30705, 30713, 30774, 30783, 30798, 30790, 30831, 30869, 31367
Schwager 30752
Scientific Labs 30769
Scott	30672, 30851, 31005, 31006, 31233, 31423
Sceltech 31224, 31451
SFG	30798, 30865, 30713, 30793, 30872, 30884, 31483, 31530
Sensory Science 31158
Shanghai 30672
Sharp	30830, 30875, 30713, 30757, 31256, 32015, 32024
Sharper Image 31117
Sherwood 30/17, 30741, 30770
Shinco 30/17
Shinsonic 30535, 30838
Siemens 31362
Signatak 31005, 31224
Silurus 31224
Silva 30788, 30958
Silva Schneider 30831, 30958
SilverCost	31152
Sinaudio 30885
Singer	30890, 30751, 30758
Sistemas	30672
Stantis	30539, 30713
Seymaster 30730, 30768
Skyworth 30888
Sliding 31115
Slim Art	30764
SM Technomic	30890, 30730, 30758, 31152
Smart	3070s, 30713
Saraal 30795
Sonashi	30931
Sonic Plus	30573, 30715, 30763, 30869, 31099
Sony	30533, 31533, 30864, 30673, 30839, 30772, 31033, 31070, 31431, 31433, 31550, 31603, 31633, 31851, 32043
Sound Color	31233

Soundmaster 30/68

Soundmax 30788
Soundwave	30783
Specura	30872
Standard	30851, 30768, 30768, 30831, 30899
Star Clusters	31152, 31227
Starlogic	31005
Starmedia	31005, 31224
Stovison	31367
Strong	30713
Sunkai 30770, 30850
Sunitech	30831
Sunwood 30788, 30888
Supersonic	30821
Supervision	30768, 31152
SVA	30872, 30717, 30752, 31105
Sylvania	30850, 30875, 30821, 31269
Symphonic	30875, 30821, 31256
Symi	30768
Tanchberg	30713, 31635
Tangent	31321
Targa	31227
Tatung 30770, 31695
Tchibo	30841
TCL	31180
TCM	30741, 30750
Isac	32671, 30717, 30675, 30741, 32758, 30768, 30750, 30803, 31005, 31157, 31227
Tuc	30788
Technice 31367, 31695
Techmics	30490, 30703, 31905
Techmiko 30770, 30831, 31115, 31685
Techinson	31115
Technosonic	30750, 31261, 31115
Tachwood	30713, 31590
Tabletax	30650, 30758, 31004, 31228
Telefunkin	32183, 30790, 30833, 31493, 31832, 31523
Teletech	30713, 30768
Tensai	30651, 30690, 30770
Textron	32651, 30798, 30768, 30832, 32694, 31236, 31277, 31347, 31382, 31483, 31750, 31923
Theta Digital	30571
Thomson	32622, 30511, 30551
Tivo	31503
Tokai	31784, 30865, 30788, 30790, 32899
Fox-Toc	31789
Jop Suwoss	31224
Toshiba	32603, 30873, 30539, 30685, 31045, 31154, 31503, 31510, 31769
TRANS-continents	30831, 30872, 31321, 31327

Transonic 30730

Tracex	30873
InVision	31451
Isinghua longiang	31235
TSM	31224
Unmax 30600, 31151
Unimax	30770
United	30675, 30695, 30894, 31713, 30/30, 30/36, 30884, 31115, 31152, 31226, 31367, 31852
Universain	30651, 30713, 30741, 30790, 30869, 31227, 31530, 31913
Uptek	30/63
upXus	31345
Uran Concepts 30503, 30x39
US Logic 30839
Venturer	30790
Vestud	30713, 30894, 31530
Victor	31597
Vicola	30705
Viewmaster	30882, 31224
Vixson	30650, 30730, 30774, 30831
Virak	31228
Waitup	31151, 31224, 31233
Walkison	30/17
Walham	31530
Walkin 30851
Wellington	30/13
Welster 30713
Waster	30639
Wharlicduo	30686, 30751, 30752, 30790, 31332
Wilson 30851, 31233
Windsor	30713
Windy Sun	30573
WIZE	31115
Wixter	31005, 31151, 31224
Xbox 30522, 31708
Xenica 30790
XLogic	30798, 31152, 31229
XMS	307/0, 30/88
Xoo	31183, 31250
Yakumo	31004, 31056
Yamada	30872, 31004, 31056, 31151, 31158
Yamachi	30450, 30538, 30645, 30545, 31354
Yamagawa	30665, 30672, 31104
Yukai	30730, 31730
Zenith	30503, 30591, 30741, 30869, 31906
Zinus	30791

DVD Recorder

1 4Kus 31158

A	Airis	31321
	Akira	31321
	Alba	31530
	Apex Digital	31056
	Aristova	30846
	Aspire Digital	31188
B	Balcon	31086
C	Cat	31421
	cello	31230
	Centura	31227
	Classic	31730
	Cutty	31086
	Compass	31321
	Conia 31321
	CyberHoma	31129, 31502
D	Cyturi	31347
	Denosi	30450
	Denver 31056
	Digitrex	31056
	DSE	31730
	Durabrand 31502
E	Emax	31321
	Ellon	31421
	Ethrax 31321
	Enuronson	30575
F	Ferguson 31730
	Firstline	31530
	Funai	30675
	Gateway	31198
G	Go Vidac 30741, 31158, 31730
	Goodmans 31530, 31730
	GPX	30741
	Grundig	31730
H	H & B	31421
	Humax	30696
I	Ito	31346
J	JVC	31164, 31567
K	Kansas Technologies	31030
	Kreisen	31421
	KKD	31321
L	LG	30741
	Liulux	31347
	LiChi	31158
	Locke	30741
	Lumation 31321
	Luxor	31730
M	Magnevoc 30848, 30875
	Musaol 31730
	Mowont	31347
	MBC 31730
	Medion	31347
	MICO	30751

	Mitsubishi	31/03
	Musiek 31730
N	NEC 31404
O	Dopla	31158
P	Palsonic	31056, 31321
	Panasonic 30490, 315v9
	Philips	30646, 31158
	Pinoer	30631
	Polaroid	31066
	ProVision 31321
	Pye	30646
R	RCA	30522
	Relieve	31347
	Roostar	31227
S	Sampo 31347
	Samsung	30450, 31635
	ScanMagic 31730
	Schneider 30646
	SEG	31530
	Sensory Science 31158
	Sharp	30630, 30675
	Sony	31033, 31070, 31431, 31433, 31536
	Star Clusters	31227
T	Sylvania	30675
	Tongent	31321
	Terpa	31227
	Teac	31227
	Techwood 31530
	Tokon 31227, 31347, 31730
	Thomson	30851
	Toohibe	31510
U	Universal 31227, 31530
V	Vesud 31530
	Victor	31587
W	Wallison	31530
Y	Yakuma	31056
	Yamada	31056, 31158
	Yamaha	30646
	Yukai	31730
Z	Zurich 30741

DVD preset codes / Codes préréglés DVD
DENON	32134 (default / défaut) 30490
Model No. / Modèle numéro	DVD-555	DVD-2910	DVD-800
	DVD-755	DVD-2930CI	DVD-1600
	DVD-900	DVD-3800	DVD-2000
	DVD-910	DVD-3910	DVD-2500
	DVD-955	DVD-3930CI	DVD-3000
	DVD-1000	DVD-5900	DVD-3300
	DVD-1200	DVD-5910
	DVD-1500	DVD-9000
	DVD-1710	DVM-715
	DVD-1910	DVM-1800
	DVD-1830CI	DVM-1805
	DVD-2200	DVM-1815
	DVD-2600	DVM-2815
	DVD-2800II	DVM-4800
	DVD-2900